201003231452[9145]

OPERATING/PROGRAMMINGSUPPLEMENTforCINCINNATIHAWK TURNING CENTERModel 150 / 200 / 250 (ERD)with FANUC SERIES 21iCNC CONTROL

PUBLICATION NO. 91203597B001

IMPORTANT

Carefully read the instructions and safety precautions given in thismanual. Do not attempt to operate this machine until you have thor-oughly read and understood the material contained in this manualand all other applicable manuals.

At the time of writing, the book was completely up--to--date. However,due to continual improvements in design, it is possible that descrip-tions contained herein may vary to a slight extent from the system de-livered to you. This merely implies that the system has been improvedto better fulfill your requirements. You are encouraged to contact thenearest Cincinnati Machine representative for clarification.

Patents Notice

The machine and attachments and parts thereof illustrated and described inthis book are manufactured under and protected by issued and pendingBritish and Foreign Patents and copyright is reserved in any original designfeature thereof and in the contents of this book and every part thereof.

IMPORTANT

Cincinnati Machine U.K. LimitedP.O. Box 505, Kingsbury Road,Birmingham, B24 0QU

1998 Cincinnati Machine, a Division of UNOVA Industrial Automation Systems, Inc.

Cincinnati Machine, CINCINNATI, DART, ARROW, SABRE, LANCER and HAWK aretrademarks of Cincinnati Machine, a division of UNOVA Industrial Automation Systems, Inc.

ACRAMATIC is a trademark of Vickers E.S.D., Inc.

Printed in England -- EDITION 1 -- June 1999

--1

FOREWORD

The purpose of this manual is to provide the necessary information toenable suitably experienced personnel, to operate the CINCINNATIHAWK 150/200/250 Turning Centers equipped with Fanuc 21i controlsystem.

Information contained in this manual is not warranted and is subject tochange without notice.

The manual has not been prepared to enable inexperienced personnel tooperate the machine without further training.

The owner/user is responsible for the training of inexperiencedpersonnel and for providing the background necessary for experiencedpersonnel to safely operate these machines.

It is intended to cover the control of the MTB (Machine Tool Builders)dependant functions as applicatble to the HAWK TURNING MA-CHINE with Fanuc control.

It does not include general part programming or control maintenanceinformation. These are covered in the appropriate GE FANUCOperators and maintenance manuals, as supplied with the machine.

The chapter on general safety precautions should be observed at alltimes during machine operation and maintenance. Read this chapterbefore reading the remaining chapters in this manual and operating themachine.

Any questions pertaining to the operation of the machine should be directed to:

Field Service Department Cincinnati MachineCincinnati Machine U.K. Ltd, Marketing Company,P.O. Box 505, Cincinnati,Kingsbury Road, Ohio 45209--9988,Birmingham, B24 0QU USA.England Main Tel: (513) 841--8100Tel: 0121--351--3821 Service Tel: (513) 841 3000Fax: 0121--313--1184 Service Fax: (513) 841 8871

DANGER

HIGH VOLTAGE

Lethal voltages are present in the magnetics and electrical control cabinets when the MACHINE MAIN DIS-CONNECT is ’ON’. Current and voltage measurements should be attempted only by qualified electrical main-tenance personnel.

Before working on any electrical circuits, turn the machine Main Disconnect Device ’OFF’ and lock It.

Capacitors in the Servo Drives require up to 20 minutes to completely discharge. Always verify that dischargeis complete using a known working and calibrated voltmeter before commencing work on these units.

Unless expressly stated in applicable Cincinnati Machine documentation or by the appropriate Cincinnati Ma-chine Field Service Representative, do NOT work with electrical power ’ON’. If such express statement ofadvice exists, working with electrical power ’ON’ should be performed by a Cincinnati Machine Field ServiceRepresentative. The customer and subsequent transferees must determine that any other person performingwork with electrical power ’ON’ is trained and technically qualified.

Failure To Follow This Instruction May Result In Death Or Serious Personal Shock Injury.

WARNING 1

In order to clearly showdetails of this machine,some covers, shields,guards, barriers, devices ordoors have either beenremoved or shown in an”open” position. All suchprotective componentsmust be installed in posi-tion before operating thismachine.

Failure to follow thisinstruction may result inpersonal injury.

WARNING 2

CUTTING FLUIDS

When soluble coolants areused, it is important to en-sure that recommendedconcentration levels aremaintained.

Failure to follow thisinstruction can cause corro-sion of safety critical parts,resulting in machine dam-age and/or serious personalinjury.

Table of Contents

Chapter 1Safety Precautions 1--1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Important 1--1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .General Safety Instructions And Considerations 1--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Personal Safety 1--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Work Area Safety 1--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Tool Safety 1--3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Lifting And Carrying Safety 1--3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Installation And Relocation Safety 1--4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Setup And Operation Safety 1--4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Maintenance Safety 1--5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Materials Used With This Product 1--6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LIFTING DEVICES 1--7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .GENERAL 1--7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .EYEBOLTS 1--7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HOIST RINGS 1--9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPREADER BARS AND LIFTING BEAMS 1--10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .CHAIN 1--10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .CABLE SLINGS 1--12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SYNTHETIC MATERIAL SLINGS 1--13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P TYPE HOOKS 1--14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .S HOOKS 1--14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .U TYPE HOOKS 1--16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .GENERAL SAFETY LIFTING INFORMATION 1--17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fluids Used With Machine Tools 1--18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .General Considerations 1--18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Lubricants 1--18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Cutting Fluids 1--18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Sources Of Information -- USA 1--18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Usage Information 1--19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cutting Fluids -- Preventative Maintenance 1--20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See Cautions 1 and 2 1--20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Water Quality 1--20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Too Soft 1--20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Too Hard 1--20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Cleaning The Coolant Reservoir 1--20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Lifespan 1--21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Tramp Oil 1--21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Filtering 1--21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Rust Prevention 1--21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Printed Circuit Board Handling Instructions 1--22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .General 1--22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Recommended Handling Procedure 1--22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Safety Features 1--23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Perimeter Guarding 1--23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Operator Sliding Door(s) 1--23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents

Feed Hold Push Button 1--24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Emergency Stop Push Button 1--24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Electrical Isolation Device (Main Disconnect Switch) 1--24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Air Supply Isolation Valve 1--24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Metric Lifting Points 1--24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Machine Related Safety And Usage Notes 1--25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Axis Overtravel Condition 1--25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Safe Operation Of Lathe Chucks 1--25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Work Holding Devices 1--25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .General Operation 1--26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Battery Replacement 1--27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Lithium Batteries 1--27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 2System Information 2--1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction 2--1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Guard Strength 2--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Noise 2--3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Fumes And Coolant Misting 2--4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Fire Hazard 2--4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Machine Location -- See Caution 2--4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .EMC Directive Requirements 2--4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .NC Control 2--5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Machine Information 2--5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Axis Orientation 2--6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Hawk Specification 2--7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Machine And Range Drawings 2--9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Motor Rating 2--25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .MACHINE ALIGNMENT AND PROGRAM POINTS 2--27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Machine Zero 2--27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 3Functional Description of Controls 3--1. . . . . . . . . .Introduction -- GE FANUC 21i--TA CNC System 3--1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .OPERATOR PANEL -- PUSHBUTTON DESCRIPTIONS 3--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

AUTOMATIC OPERATION -- PROGRAMME SOURCE 3--3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .MEMORY OPERATION -- (Push button with LED) (A1) 3--3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .EDIT MODE -- (Push button with LED) (A2) 3--3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .MDI OPERATION -- (Push button with LED) (A3) 3--3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

EXECUTION PUSHBUTTONS 3--3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .CYCLE START (Push button with LED) (F1) 3--3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .CYCLE STOP (Push button with LED) (F2) 3--3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROGRAMME STOP (Push button with LED) (F3) 3--4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SPINDLE CONTROL BUTTONS 3--4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPINDLE STOP (Push button with LED) (F5) 3--4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPINDLE CLOCKWISE (CW) (Push Button with LED) (F4) 3--4. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents

SPINDLE COUNTER CLOCKWISE (CCW) (Push button with LED) (F6) 3--4. . .SPINDLE 100% (Push button with LED) (D5) 3--5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPINDLE SPEED INCREMENT (Push button with LED) (D6) 3--5. . . . . . . . . . . .SPINDLE SPEED DECREMENT (Push button with LED) (D4) 3--5. . . . . . . . . . . .

OPERATION BUTTONS 3--5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ALIGN MACHINE -- (Push Button with LED) (A4) 3--5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .MPG MODE (HANDWHEEL) & INCREMENT SELECTION

PUSHBUTTONS 3--5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .MPG MODE -- 0.001mm (Push Button with LED) (B4) 3--5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .MPG MODE -- 0.010mm (Push Button with LED) (B5) 3--6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .MPG MODE -- 0.100mm (Push Button with LED) (B6) 3--6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .JOG MODE -- (Push Button with LED) (A5) 3--6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

OPERATION SELECT -- PUSHBUTTONS 3--6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SINGLE BLOCK -- (Push Button with LED) (B1) 3--6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .BLOCK DELETE -- (Push Button with LED) (B2) 3--6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .OPTIONAL STOP -- (Push Button with LED) (B3) 3--6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .DRY RUN -- (Push Button with LED) (C1) 3--6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROGRAMME TEST -- (Push Button with LED) (C2) 3--7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AXES INHIBIT -- (Push Button with LED) (C3) 3--7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

AXIS/DIRECTION SELECTION PUSHBUTTONS 3--7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .X+ AXIS (Push Button with LED) (B9) 3--7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .X-- AXIS (Push Button with LED) (D9) 3--7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Z+ AXIS (Push Button with LED) (C10) 3--7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Z-- AXIS (Push Button with LED) (C8) 3--7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .RAPID TRAVERSE (Push Button with LED) (C9) 3--8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PARTS CATCHER DOWN (Push Button with LED) (A6) 3--8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PARTS CATCHER UP (Push Button with LED) (A7) 3--8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TURRET JOG + (INCREMENT) (Push Button with LED) (C4) 3--8. . . . . . . . . . . .TURRET JOG -- (DECREMENT) (Push Button with LED) (C5) 3--8. . . . . . . . . . . .CHUCK -- ID GRIP (Push Button with LED) (A8) 3--8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .CHUCK -- OD GRIP (Push Button with LED) (A9) 3--8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .OFFSET MEASURE (Push Button with LED) (A10) 3--8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TOOL SETTING ARM DOWN (Push Button with LED) (D2) 3--9. . . . . . . . . . . . .TOOL SETTING ARM UP (Push Button with LED) (D3) 3--9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROGRAM RESTART (Push Button with LED) (D1) 3--9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AUX 1 -- Auxillary Push Button (Push Button with LED) (C6) 3--9. . . . . . . . . . . . .

COOLANT BUTTONS 3--9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .COOLANT OFF (Push Button with LED) (F9) 3--9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .COOLANT ON (Push Button with LED) (F8) 3--9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .COOLANT AUTO (Push Button with LED) (F10) 3--9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS 3--10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .MEMORY PROTECTION -- Keyswitch 3--10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .RS 232 SERIAL DATA PORT 3--10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .FEED/RAPID/JOG OVERRIDE -- Selector Switch 3--10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .EMERGENCY STOP (red mushroom pushbutton with latch) 3--10. . . . . . . . . . . . . .MTB OPERATORS CONTROL PANEL 3--11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Spindle Load Meter 3--11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents

0 to 100% Range (Continuous rating) 3--11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 to 150% Range -- Yellow Band (30 minutes 50% rating) 3--12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151 to 180% Range -- Red Band (1 minute overload capacity) 3--12. . . . . . . . . . . . . .MASTER START -- Illuminated push button 3--12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .CYCLE START 3--12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HANDWHEEL (MPG) 3--13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .CHUCK UNCLAMP push button 3--13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .CHUCK CLAMP push button 3--13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TAILSTOCK QUILL ADVANCE/STEP ADVANCE push button 3--14. . . . . . . . . . .TAILSTOCK QUILL RETRACT push button 3--14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Machine Pressure -- Tailstock Thrust -- Chuck Drawbar Force -- Chuck Brake (Dampener) Control . .3--15MAIN POWER DISCONNECT SWITCH 3--16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Optional Operating Devices 3--17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Swarf Conveyor 3--17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Wash Gun 3--18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .GENERAL CHUCK SAFETY GUIDELINES 3--19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CHUCKS 3--20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .CHUCKING SYSTEM TYPES 3--20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CHUCK 3--20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .CENTRIFUGAL FORCE AND SPEED LIMITATIONS 3--20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .CHUCK LUBRICATION 3--20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TOP JAW RECOMMENDATIONS 3--21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 4Machine Start Up and Alignment Procedure 4--1. .Machine Start Up and Alignment Procedure 4--1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .General 4--1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Start Up and Shut Down Procedures 4--1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Start Up 4--1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Shut Down 4--1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Machine/Control Alignment Procedure 4--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Turret Alignment 4--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Drive Tool Machines only 4--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 5Software and Hardware Axis Overtravel 5--1. . . . . .Software Axis Overtravel 5--1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .CANCELLING SOFTWARE RANGE CHECKING 5--1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Hardware Axis Overtravel 5--1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 6G codes 6--1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G codes 6--1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 7M codes 7--1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M codes 7--1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents

M codes supported on Cincinnati Turning Centres 7--1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Function Description of M Codes 7--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

M00 PROGRAMME STOP (STOPS SPINDLE) 7--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M01 OPTIONAL PROGRAMME STOP (STOPS SPINDLE) 7--2. . . . . . . . . . . . .M02 END OF PROGRAMME 7--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M03 START SPINDLE CCW 7--3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M04 START SPINDLE CW 7--3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M05 SPINDLE STOP 7--3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M08 FLOOD COOLANT START 7--3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M09 COOLANT OFF 7--3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M13 START SPINDLE COUNTER CLOCKWISE WITH COOLANT 7--3. . . . . .M14 START SPINDLE CLOCKWISE WITH COOLANT 7--3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M19 ORIENTED SPINDLE STOP 7--3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M30 END OF PROGRAM AND REWIND 7--3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M34 PARTS CATCHER ADVANCE 7--4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M35 PARTS CATCHER RETRACT 7--4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M44 RENISHAW TOOL SETTING ARM (TSA) UP 7--4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M45 RENISHAW TOOL SETTING ARM (TSA) DOWN 7--4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M46 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE DISABLE (100%) 7--4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M47 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE ENABLE 7--4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M48 SPINDLE SPEED OVERRIDE DISABLE (100%) 7--4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M49 SPINDLE SPEED OVERRIDE ENABLE 7--4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M50 C--AXIS MODE OFF (Driven Tool Machines only) 7--5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M51 C--AXIS MODE ON (Driven Tool Machines only) 7--5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M52 C--AXIS BRAKE ON (In--Position Mode, Driven Tool FeatureDriven tool machines only)

7--5M53 C--AXIS BRAKE ON-- (Interpolation Mode, Driven Tool Feature)Half pressure -- contour-

ing(Driven tool machines only) 7--5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

M54 C--AXIS BRAKE OFF (Driven Tool Machines only) 7--6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M61 BARFEED MACRO CALL 7--6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M68 ADVANCE TAILSTOCK QUILL 7--6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M69 RETRACT TAILSTOCK QUILL 7--6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M70 TO M73 CUSTOMER OUTPUTS (OPTIONAL) 7--6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M74 COLLET CHUCK MODE DISABLE 7--7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M75 COLLET CHUCK MODE ENABLE 7--7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M76 FORCE TURRET ROTATION CW 7--7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M77 FORCE TURRET ROTATION CCW 7--7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M78 CHUCK OPEN 7--7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M79 CHUCK CLOSE 7--7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M80 BARFEED EJECT/RELOAD NEW BAR 7--7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M86 BARFEED PRESSURE ON

(HYDRAFEED AND FEEDMASTER ONLY) 7--7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M87 BARFEED PRESSURE OFF

(HYDRAFEED AND FEEDMASTER ONLY) 7--7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M90 BARFEED MODE ON 7--7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M91 BARFEED MODE OFF 7--7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M92 BARFEED ROTATION ON 7--8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents

M93 BARFEED ROTATION OFF 7--8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M94 INCREMENT PARTS COUNTER 7--8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M98 SUBROUTINE CALL 7--8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M99 END OF SUBROUTINE 7--8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 8Spindle Functions 8--1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Spindle Functions 8--1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Driven Tool Machines 8--1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Spindle Jog 8--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 9Tooling Functions 9--1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Tool Turret 9--1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Turret Indexes 9--1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Driven Tool Machines 9--1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .T Word 9--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Force Turret CW and CCW 9--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Tool Life Management 9--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 10Driven Tools 10--1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Introduction 10--1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C--Axis Mode Enable/Disable 10--1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C--Axis Initialisation 10--1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C--Axis Positioning Mode 10--1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Programming Considerations 10--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C--Axis Interpolation Mode 10--5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Programming Considerations 10--5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 11Toolsetter 11--1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Introduction 11--1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TSA 11--1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HPA 11--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Macro Probing Routines 11--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Manual Tool Setting 11--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Auto Tool Setting -- TSA only 11--3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Operator and Programming Notes 11--3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tool Setting Arm Activation -- TSA 11--3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M44 TSA Up 11--3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M45 TSA Down 11--3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Tool Setting Arm Down Pushbutton 11--4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Tool Setting Arm Up Pushbutton 11--4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HPA -- Manual Toolsetting Arm 11--4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Fitting Arm 11--4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents

Removing Arm 11--4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TSA/HPA Calibration 11--4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Stylus Alignment 11--5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Stylus Alignment 11--5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Stylus Position 11--5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Control Options 11--5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Standard Calibration Data -- Base Number 522 11--5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Adjusting the Software Back Off Distance 11--6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Macro Parameters 11--6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Tool Nose Vector Hh 11--8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calibration 11--9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Manual Calibration -- Macro O9011 11--9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction 11--9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Description 11--9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Application 11--9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Format 11--9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Macro Parameters 11--9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Outputs 11--10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Manual Tool Setting -- Macro O9011 11--11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Description 11--11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Application 11--11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Format 11--11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Macro Parameters 11--11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Outputs 11--11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Set a Tool 11--11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Broken Tool Check 11--12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Auto Tool Setting -- Macro O9012 -- TSA Only 11--15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Description 11--15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Application 11--15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Format 11--15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Macro Parameters 11--15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 12Parts Catcher 12--1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Introduction 12--1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Operation 12--1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M34 Parts Catcher Advance 12--1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M35 Parts Catcher Retract 12--1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Parts Catcher Advance Push Button 12--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Parts Catcher Retract Push Button 12--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Operator and Programming Notes 12--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Programming Example 12--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 13Barfeeder 13--1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction 13--1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents

Bar Preparation 13--1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M--Codes 13--1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Standard Barfeed Sequence for Multifeed Unit:-- 13--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Standard Barfeed Sequence for Hydrafeed and Feedmaster 13--3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Barfeed Spindle Rotation Speed Bits -- Keep Relay K Bits 13--4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 14Reserved Macro Routines 14--1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Used Macro Variables 14--1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 15Connection to Data Input/Output Devices 15--1. . . .

Connection to Data Input and Output Devices 15--1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Input/Output Device and Code Number 15--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 16Diagnostics 16--1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PMC Input Address Reference List 16--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PMC Output Address Reference List 16--3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .FANUC Operators Panel Connection Signals 16--4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .FANUC Operator Station 16--5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Self--Diagnostic Function 16--5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Status Display LED 16--5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Test Mode 16--5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FANUC Operator Station Key/LED -- Diagnostic Address Table 16--6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Alarm Messages 16--7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Operator Messages 16--73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents

Fig. 1Preferred Inch Lifting Eyebolts 1--7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fig. 2Preferred Metric Lifting Eyebolts 1--8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fig. 3Eyebolt Loading 1--8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fig. 4Eyebolt I.D. Plates -- Inch and Metric 1--8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fig. 5Instruction Plate -- Inch (Part Number 3375984) 1--8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fig. 6Instruction Plate -- Metric (Part Number 3375983) 1--8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fig. 7Hoist Ring 1--9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fig. 8Hoist Ring Table 1--9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fig. 9Spreader Bar -- Typical 1--10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fig. 10Steel Alloy Chains 1--11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fig. 11Wire Rope Slings 1--12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fig. 12Sling Load Angle Chart 1--13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fig. 13“P” Type Lifting Hooks 1--14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fig. 14“P” Type Lifting Hooks 1--14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fig. 15“S” Hooks 1--15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fig. 16“S” Hooks 1--15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fig. 17“U” Type Lifting Hooks 1--16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fig. 18“U” Lifting Hook Table 1--16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fig. 19Safety Latch 1--17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1--26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Fig. 20

Driven Head Tool Holder 1--26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Fig. 21

Hawk Turning Center 2--1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Fig. 22

Axis Orientation -- Hawk Turning Centre 2--6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Fig. 23

Front View 2--9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Fig. 24

Left Side View 2--10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Fig. 25

Turning Capacity Chart -- Hawk 150 (VDI Tooling) 2--11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Fig. 26

Turning Capacity Chart -- Hawk 200 Machines (VDI Tooling) 2--12. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents

Fig. 27Turning Capacity Chart -- Hawk 250 Machines (VDI Tooling) 2--13. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fig. 28Data Sheets -- Hawk 150 (VDI Tooling) 2--14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fig. 29Stroke -- Hawk 200 Machines (VDI Tooling) 2--15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fig. 30Stroke -- Hawk 250 Machines (VDI Tooling) 2--16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fig. 31Optional Standard Tooling Package -- Hawk 150 (VDI Tooling) 2--17. . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fig. 32Optional Standard Tooling Package -- Hawk 200/250 Machines (VDI Tooling) 2--18.

Fig. 33Work Holding Options -- Hawk 150 2--19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .




Fig. 37Work Holding Options -- Hawk 250 (Continued| 2--23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fig. 38Bar Feed Options -- Hawk 150 machines 2--24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fig. 39Hawk 150 -- Spindle Power Characteristics 2--25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



Fig. 42Machine Alignment And Program Points 2--27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fig. 43Control Station Layout for:-- Hawk Turning centres with fanuc 21i TA 3--1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fig. 44Operators Control Panel 3--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fig. 45MTB Operators Control Panel 3--11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fig. 46Spindle Load Meter 3--11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fig. 47Main Spindle Chuck & Tailstock Pressure 3--15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fig. 48Chuck Brake Pressure (Option) 3--15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fig. 49Swarf Conveyor Control Panel 3--17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fig. 4912 Position Turret -- showing Rotation Directions 9--1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fig. 51Driven Tool Setup -- Positioning Mode 10--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fig. 52C--Axis Positioning 10--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents

Fig. 53Canned Cycle -- Front Machining 10--3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fig. 54Canned Cycle -- Side Machining 10--4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fig. 55Driven Tool Setup -- Interpolation Mode 10--5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fig. 56C--Axis Position Command 10--6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fig. 57Polar Co--ordinate Interpolation 10--7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fig. 58Cylindrical Interpolation 10--8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fig. 58Probe Configuration 11--1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fig. 59Probe Configuration 11--2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fig. 60Parts Catcher fitted to Operator Door 12--1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fig. 61Operators Control Panel 16--6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 1--1

Chapter 1Safety Precautions

Important

These safety precautions for this CINCINNATI machinehave beenpreparedto assist the operator, programmer and maintenance personnel in practicinggood shop safety procedures.

Operator and maintenance personnel must read and understand theseprecautions completely before operating, setting up, running, or performingmaintenance on the machine.

These precautions are to be used as a guide to supplement safety precautionsand warnings in the following:

a. All other manuals pertaining to the machine.

b. Local, plant, and shop safety rules and codes.

c. National safety laws and regulations.

WARNING

Read related safety pre-cautions before operatingthis machine. Failure tofollow safety instructionsmay result in serious per-sonal injury.

WARNING

In order to clearly show de-tails of this machine, somecovers, shields, guards,barriers, devices, or doorshave either been removedor shown in an ”open”position. All such protec-tive components must beinstalled in position beforeoperating this machine.Failure to follow thisinstruction may result inserious personal injury.

Page 1--2 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001

General Safety Instructions And Considerations

Personal Safety

Machine owners, operators, setup men, maintenance, and service personnelmust be aware of the fact that constant day--to--day safety procedures are avital part of their job. Accident prevention must be one of the principalobjectives of the job regardless of what activity is involved.

Know and respect your machinery. Read and practice the prescribed safetyand checking procedures. Make sure that everyone who works for, with, ornear you fully understands and -- more importantly -- complies with thefollowing safety precautions and procedures when operating this machine.

Sudden movements, loud noises, horseplay, etc., must be avoided. Thesedistractions may result in unsafe conditions for those working near themachinery.

Observe and follow safety instructions such as “NO SMOKING”, “HighVoltage”, “DANGER”, etc., in your working area.

Accidents can occur that result in serious personal injury to yourself orothers due to clothing and other articles becoming entangled in cutters, handwheels, levers, or moving machine elements. The following suggestions, iffollowed, will help you to avoid such accidents: Neckties, scarfs, gloves(except as worn for protection when handling sharp edged cutting tools orrough, sharp or hot parts, see TOOL SAFETY) loose hanging clothing, andjewelry such as watches, rings, or necklaces must not be worn aroundmoving machinery. Restrain long hair with a cap or net. Wear gloves onlywhen handling rough, sharp, or hot parts.

Use safety protective equipment. Wear clean approved eye or faceprotection. Safety--toe shoes with slip--proof soles can help you avoidinjury. Keep your protective equipment in good condition.

Never operate or service this equipment if affected by alcohol, drugs or othersubstances or conditions which decrease alertness or judgment.

Work Area Safety

Always keep your work area clean. Dirty work areas with such hazards asoil, debris, or water on the floor may cause someone to fall to the floor, intothe machine, or onto other objects resulting in serious personal injury.

Make sure your work area is free of hazardous obstructions and be aware ofprotruding machine members.

Return tools and similar equipment to their proper storage place immediate-ly after use. Keep work benches neat, orderly, and clean.

Report unsafe working conditions to your supervisor or safety department.Items such as: worn or broken flooring, ladders, and handrails, unstable orslippery platforms, or scaffolds must be reported and repaired before use.Do not use skids, work pieces, stock, machines, tote pans, and boxes asmakeshift climbing aides.

WARNING

Failure to follow instruc-tions on this page may re-sult in serious personal in-jury.


Tool Safety

Sharp edged cutting tools must be handled with gloves or a shop cloth.Inspect cutting tools before use and reject defective tools.

See WARNING 1.

Remove hand tooling such as wrenches, measuring equipment, hammers,and other miscellaneous parts from the machine immediately after usage.

Lifting And Carrying Safety

Contact supervision if you have any questions or are not sure about theproper procedures for lifting and carrying.

Before lifting or carrying an object, determine the weight and size byreferring to such things as tags, shipping data, labels, marked information,or manuals.

Use power hoists or other mechanical lifting and carrying equipment forheavy, bulky, or hard to handle objects. Use hookup methods recommendedby your safety department and know the signals for safely directing a craneoperator.

Never place any part of your body under a suspended load or move asuspended load over any part of another person’s body. Before lifting, becertain that you have a safe spot for depositing the load. Never work on acomponent while it is hanging from a crane or other lifting mechanism.

If in doubt as to the size or type of lifting equipment, method, andproceduresfor lifting, contact Cincinnati Machine before proceeding to lift the machineor its components.

Always inspect slings, chains, hoists, and other lifting devices prior to use.Do not use lifting devices found to be defective or questionable.

Never exceed the safety rated capacity of cranes, hoists, slings, eyebolts, andother lifting equipment. Follow, National and local, standards andinstructions applicable to any lifting equipment you use.

Before inserting an eyebolt, be certain that both the eyebolt and the holehave the same size and type threads. To attain safe working loads, at least90% of the threaded portion of a standard forged eyebolt must be engaged.

WARNING


WARNING 1

CUTTING TOOLS

Use adequate handprotection at all timeswhen handling sharpedged cutting tools.

Failure to follow thisinstruction may result inserious personal injury.


Installation And Relocation Safety

Before lifting the machine, consult the machine manual or CincinnatiMachine for proper methods and procedures.

An electrician must read and understand the electrical schematics prior toconnecting the machine to the power source. After connecting the machine,test all aspects of the electrical system for proper functioning. Always makesure the machine is grounded properly. Place all selector switches in theirOFF or neutral (disengaged) position. The doors of the main electricalcabinet must be closed and the main disconnect switch must be in the OFFposition after the power source connection is complete.

Always lock the main disconnect device in the OFF position if the machineis left unattended, unless machine is part of an unmanned manufacturingsystem and in a production cycle.

When the machine is installed, be sure that the motors rotate in the properindicated direction.

Setup And Operation Safety

Read and understand all the safety instructions before setting up, operating,or servicing this machine. Assign only qualified personnel, instructed insafety and all machine functions, to operate or service this machine.

Operators and maintenance personnel must carefully read, understand, andfully comply with all machine mounted warning and instruction plates. Donot paint over, alter, or deface these plates or remove themfrom themachine.Replace all plates which become illegible. Replacement plates can bepurchased from Cincinnati Machine.

Safety guards, shields, barriers, covers, and protective devices must beconnected or in place before operating the machine.

All safety features, disengagements, and interlocks must be in place andfunctioning correctly prior to operation of this equipment. Never bypass orwire around any safety device.

When setting up or adjusting a workpiece or fixture, be certain it is a safedistance away from the cutting tool. Always retract the workpiece a safedistance from the cutting tool when loading and unloading.

The spindle must be stopped before adjusting the coolant discharge nozzle.

Never brake or slow down moving machinery with your hand or with somemakeshift device. Never use machine power to remove a nut from any shaft.The spindle and slides must be stopped when measuring work pieces,changing tools, or removing chips and grit. Remove chips and grit with achip rake or brush, not with your hands.

WARNING



Keep all parts of your body off the machine table, table edge, out of the pathof moving units, trip dogs, trip plungers, and out of the “machining area”during machining operations. Never lean on a machine or reach over orthrough a machine -- you can become entangled in tooling and other movingelements or you may accidentally activate start buttons, feed controls, rapidtraverse controls, power work holding control, or similar devices.

During operation, be attentive to the machining process. Excessivevibration, unusual sounds, etc., can indicate problems requiring yourimmediate attention. Watch for conditions such as packed chips or gritwhich can cause breakage of tooling or machine elements.

Shut off power to the machine when leaving the operating area or at the endof your work period. Never leave the machine running unattended, unlessit has been designed to do so. Turn the master disconnect device to the OFFposition before cleaning the machine at the end of the working day or whenguards or covers are removed that expose hazardous areas.

Maintenance Safety

See DANGER notice.

Do not attempt to perform maintenance on this machine until you read andunderstand all the safety instructions.

Assign only qualified service or maintenance personnel trained byCincinnati Machine, to perform maintenance and repair work on thismachine. They should consult the service manual before attempting anyservice or repair work and when in doubt contact Cincinnati Machine. Useonly Cincinnati Machine replacement parts; others may impair the safety ofthe machine. Before performing maintenance or service work, Warning orDanger signs must be placed conspicuously about the machine. Beforedetaching counterweights or driving mechanisms, vertical sliding membersmust be blocked properly. See the Service Manual for proper dismantlingprocedures.

Before removing or opening any electrical enclosure, cover, plate, or door,be sure that the Main Disconnect Switch is in the OFF position. If any toolis required to remove a guard, cover, bracket, or any basic part of thismachine, place the Main Disconnect Switch in the OFF position, lock it inthe OFF position. If possible, post a sign at the disconnect switch indicatingthat maintenance is being performed.

Whenever maintenance is to be performed in an area away from thedisconnect and the disconnect is not locked, tag all start button stations witha “DO NOT START” tag. Adequate precautions, such as locks on circuitbreakers, warning notices, or other equally effective means must be takento prevent electrical equipment from being electrically activated whenmaintenance work is being performed.

Before attempting to adjust, repair, or perform maintenance on electricalcircuits connected with yellow wires, first find the source of power, turn itoff, and lock it in the OFF position. Machine tool interlock control circuitsconnected with yellow wires are powered from a source away from themachine and carry voltage even when the machine’s main disconnect deviceis turned to the OFF position.

When removing electrical equipment, place number or labeled tags on thosewires not marked. If wiring, is replaced, be sure it is of the same type, length,size, and has the same current carrying capacity.

WARNING



Close and securely fasten all guards, shields, covers, plates, or doors beforepower is reconnected.

An electrical technician must analyze the electrical system to determine thepossible use of power retaining devices such as capacitors. Such powerretaining devices must be disconnected, discharged, or made safe beforemaintenance is performed.

Working space around electrical equipment must be clear of obstructions.Provide adequate illumination to allow for proper operation and mainte-nance.

DANGER

HIGH VOLTAGE

Lethal voltages are present in the magnetics and electricalcontrol cabinets when the MACHINE MAIN DISCONNECT is’ON’. Current and voltage measurements should be at-tempted only by qualified electrical maintenance person-nel.

Before working on any electrical circuits, turn the machineMain Disconnect Device ’OFF’ and lock It.

Capacitors in the Servo Drives require up to 20 minutes tocompletely discharge. Always verify that discharge iscomplete using a known working and calibrated voltmeterbefore commencing work on these units.

Unless expressly stated in applicable Cincinnati Machinedocumentation or by the appropriate Cincinnati MachineField Service Representative, do NOT work with electricalpower ’ON’. If such express statement of advice exists,working with electrical power ’ON’ should be performed bya Cincinnati Machine Field Service Representative. Thecustomer and subsequent transferees must determine thatany other person performing work with electrical power’ON’ is trained and technically qualified.

FAILURE TO FOLLOW THIS INSTRUCTION MAY RESULT INDEATH OR SERIOUS PERSONAL SHOCK INJURY.

Materials Used With This Product

Various materials may be used with this product. Beforeusing/mixing/dilut-ing materials with this product, contact the manufacturer/authorizedsupplier of the material to determine that the material is suitable for theintended application and request a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) fromthe material manufacturer.

WARNING



LIFTING DEVICES

GENERAL

The use of lifting devices is subject to certain hazards that cannot be met bymechanical means but only by the exercise of intelligence, care, andcommon sense. It is, therefore, essential to have competent and carefuloperators, physically and mentally fit, thoroughly trained to the safeoperation of the equipment and the handling of the loads. Serious hazardsare overloading, dropping or slipping of the load caused by improperhitching or slinging, standing or crawling under a load, swinging loads,obstruction to the free passage of the load, using equipment for a purposeor a manner for which it was not intended or designed..

EYEBOLTS

A straight lift is preferred when using eyebolts. An angular lift placesadditional stresses on an eyebolt, above that of the load to be hoisted.

If the situation necessitates an angular lift, the safe working load for angularlifts shown in Fig. 1 and Fig. 2 should be used.

When multiple eyebolt provisions are designed into a lift, it is recommended(in most applications) that a spreader bar be used. (See Fig. 9 whichillustrates a typical spreader bar arrangement.)

No greater stress should be allowed than that given under Safe WorkingLoad in Fig. 1 and Fig. 2.

To obtain greatest strength from an eyebolt, it must fit reasonably tight inthe hole with at least 90% of the threaded length engaged.

Eyebolts should never be welded or subjected to heat in excess of 900F[480 C].

Eyebolts should never be painted or otherwise coated when used for lifting,as such coating will very likely cover up flaws.

Eyebolts should be routinely inspected for defects and if any defects arefound, they should be destroyed by melting, crushing, or cutting clear acrossthe eye.

STRAIGHT SHANK INCH (ANSI/ASME B18.15)

THREAD .375-- 16 .500-- 13 .625--11 1.000--8

SAFE WORKING LBS. [KG]LOAD

90 DEGREES 1000 1840 2940 7880[453] [834] [1333] [3573]

60 DEGREES 375 805 1340 3670[170] [365] [607] [1664]

30 DEGREES 200 470 805 2390[90] [213] [365] [1083]

PART NUMBER 3449 870 21312 19489

IDENTIFICATIONPLATE NUMBER 3338325 3338326 3338327 3338328

Fig. 1Preferred Inch Lifting Eyebolts

STRAIGHT SHANK INCH

30

6090

NOTE

The information and tablescontained in this article re-late to Cincinnati Machinemethods and standards.Consult National, Local andPlant Laws and Regulationsregarding lifting practices.

WARNING

Before inserting an eye-bolt, check to be certainthat both the eyebolt andthe hole have the samesize and type threads. Forexample: M12 with M12 or.375--16 with .375--16.

To attend safe workingloads, at least 90% of thethreaded portion of astandard forged eyeboltmust be engaged.

Failure to follow thisinstruction may result inserious injury.


SHOULDER METRIC (ISO 3266--1984)

THREAD M12 M16 M20 M30

SPOT DIAMETER 32 mm 37 mm 42 mm 67 mm1.25 in. 1.50 in. 1.65 in. 2.63 in.

SAFE WORKING [KILOGRAMS] LBS.LOAD

90 DEGREES [400] [630] [1000] [2500]882 1389 2205 5512

45 DEGREES [100] [160] [250] [625]220 352 551 1378

PART NUMBER 6014453--3 6014453--4 6014453--5 6014453--8

IDENTIFICATIONPLATE NUMBER 3338329 3338330 3338331 3338332

Fig. 2Preferred Metric Lifting Eyebolts

SHOULDER METRIC

45

90

Fig. 3Eyebolt Loading

NO

LOAD

NO

YES

LOAD

YES

30 MIN.

5 MAX.

ISO METRIC

M12

3338329

INCH

.375--16 UNC

3338325

Fig. 4Eyebolt I.D. Plates -- Inch and Metric

THIS MACHINE HAS BEENMANUFACTURED TO UTILIZE”INCH” THREAD LIFTINGDEVICES. ANY EXCEPTIONTO THIS WILL BE LABELEDADJACENT TO THE LIFTPOINT.

.25

6.00

3.00

3375984

.12 R.109 DIA.THRU4 PLACES

.12.12TYP.

NO 21 (.032) GAGE ALUMINUM.-- NO. AL 5052 ALLOY. ETCHED AREAS TOBE BLACK BAKED ENAMEL. ETCHED DEPTH TO BE .003 TO .005 INCHES---- -- OR ---- -- NO. 21 (.032) GAGE

ALUMINUM WITH METALPHOTO PROCESS. ALL LETTERING TO BE HEL-VETICA MEDIUM.

.08

Fig. 5Instruction Plate -- Inch (Part Number 3375984)

THIS MACHINE HAS BEENMANUFACTURED TO UTILIZE”METRIC” THREAD LIFTINGDEVICES. ANY EXCEPTIONTO THIS WILL BE LABELEDADJACENT TO THE LIFTPOINT.

3375983

6.3

150

75

3 R21.4

THRU--4PLACES3 TYP.3 TYP.

NO 21 (.032) GAGE ALUMINUM.-- NO. AL 5052 ALLOY. ETCHED AREAS TO BE BLACKBAKED ENAMEL. ETCHED DEPTH TO BE .003 to .005 INCHES ---- -- OR ---- -- NO. 21 (.032)GAGE ALUMINUM

WITH METALPHOTO PROCESS. ALL LETTERING TO BE HELVETICA MEDIUM.

SURFACE GRAIN TO RUN PARALLEL TO LETTERING WITH SATIN FINISH.

Fig. 6Instruction Plate -- Metric (Part Number 3375983)


HOIST RINGS

Hoist Rings are superior to eyebolts for angular lifting.

Be certain the thread projection is in accordance with the manufacturer’srecommendation.

Do not recut any damaged threads on hoist rings.

To obtain the safe working load, torque to the recommended values shownin the table below.

Observe all other safety precautions normally practiced on eyebolts.

CM HOISTRING

PART NO.

THREADSIZE

THREADTORQUE

MAX. WTEACH RING

90_

F F

W W

MAX. WTEACH RING

F F

W W

60_

F F

W W

45_

MAX. WTEACH RING

F F

W W

30_

MAX. WTEACH RING

CM IDENT.PLATE

PART. NO.

.xxx--xx

Ft--Lb N--m Lb kg Lb kg Lb kg Lb kgPART. NO.

3346225 1 .375--16 12.0 16.3 1000 450 866 390 707 318 500 225 5013055 001

3346225 2 .500--13 28.0 38 2500 1130 2165 975 1767 795 1250 562 5013055 002

3346225 3 .625--11 60.0 81.3 4000 1810 3464 1559 2828 1273 2000 900 5013055 003

3346225 4 1.000--8 230.0 312 10000 4500 8660 3897 7071 3182 5000 2250 5013055 004

3346225 6 M12X1.75 27.0 36.6 2204 991 1908 859 1558 701 1102 496 5013055 006

3346225 7 M16X2 59.0 80 3857 1736 3340 1503 2726 1227 1928 868 5013055 007

3346225 8 M20X2.5 100.0 136 4736 2132 4103 1846 3349 1507 2369 1066 5013055 008

3346225 9 M30X3.5 229.0 310 9257 4166 8016 3607 6544 2945 4628 2083 5013055 009

CM HOISTRING

PART NO.

THREADSIZE

THREADTORQUE

MAX. WTEACH RING

90_

F F

W W W W

F F90

MAX. WTEACH RING

W W

F F90

MAX. WTEACH RING CM IDENT.

PLATE

.xxx--xx

Ft--Lb N--m Lb kg Lb kg Lb kg Ft--Lb N--mPLATE

PART. NO.

3346225 1 .375--16 12.0 16.3 1000 450 1000 450 1000 450 5013055 001

3346225 2 .500--13 28.0 38 2500 1130 2500 1130 2500 1130 5013055 002

3346225 3 .625--11 60.0 81.3 4000 1810 4000 1810 4000 1810 5013055 003

3346225 4 1.000--8 230.0 312 10000 4500 10000 4500 10000 4500 5013055 004

3346225 6 M12X1.75 27.0 36 2204 991 2204 991 2204 991 5013055 006

3346225 7 M16X2 59.0 80 3857 1736 3857 1736 3857 1736 5013055 007

3346225 8 M20X2.5 100.0 136 4736 2132 4736 2132 4736 2132 5013055 008

3346225 9 M30X3.5 229.0 310 9257 4166 9257 4166 9257 4166 5013055 009

Fig. 8Hoist Ring Table NOTE F=FORCE W=WEIGHT

Fig. 7Hoist Ring


SPREADER BARS AND LIFTING BEAMS

SPREADER

TO LOAD TO LOAD

Fig. 9Spreader Bar -- Typical

Spreader bars are used when multiple eyebolts are designed into a lift.Always observe the following safety precautions when using a spreader baror lifting beam

Do not exceed the safe working load.

Use the spreader or beam to handle parts or components only for which itwas designed.

Inspect it before each use.

Do not alter or weld anything to bar or beam.

Store properly to avoid damage.

CHAIN

Select a chain with the suitable characteristics and capacity for the load. Seeabove. Always observe the following safety precautions.

Do not shorten chains with knots, bolts, or any non--approved method.

Never use damaged chain.

Hitch chain securely to the load.

Pad sharp corners with material of sufficient strength to withstand load andprotect chain.


SIZE OFCHAIN

SINGLECHAIN

90

DOUBLE SLING CHAINSTYPE D

60 45 30

TRIPLE SLING CHAINSTYPE T

60 45 30

QUAD SLING CHAINSTYPE Q

60 45 30

9/32 in. lbs. 3 250 5 625 4 600 3 250 8 400 6 900 4 875 8400 6900 4 875

.7.2 mm kg. 1 475 2 550 2 085 1 475 3 810 3 130 2 210 3 810 3 130 2 210

3/8 in. lbs. 6 600 11 400 9 300 6 600 17 100 13 950 9 900 17 100 13 950 9 900

9.5 mm kg. 2 995 5 170 4 220 2 995 7 750 6 330 4 490 7750 6 330 4 490

1/2 in. lbs. 11 250 19 700 15 900 11 250 29 250 23 850 16 875 29 250 23 850 16 875

712.7 mm kg. 5 100 8 845 7 210 5 100 13 270 10 820 7650 13 270 10 820 7650

5/8 in. lbs. 16 500 28 600 23 300 16 500 42 900 34 950 24 750 42 900 34 950 24 750

15.9 mm kg. 7 480 12 970 10 570 7 480 19 460 15 850 11 230 19 460 15 850 11 230

3/4 in. lbs. 23 000 39 800 32 500 23 000 59 700 48 750 34 500 59 700 48 700 34 500

19.1 mm kg. 10 430 18 050 14 740 10 430 27 080 22 110 15 650 27 080 22 110 15 650

7/8 in. lbs. 28 750 49 800 40 700 28 750 74 700 61 050 43 125 74 700 61 050 43 125

22.6 mm kg. 13 040 22 590 18 460 13 040 33 880 27 690 19 560 33 880 27 690 19 560

1 in. lbs. 38 750 67 100 54 800 38 750 100 650 82 200 58 125 100 660 82 200 58 125

25.4 mm kg. 17 580 30 440 24 860 17 580 45 650 37 290 26 260 45 650 37 290 26 260

1 1/4 in. lbs. 57 500 99 600 81 300 57 500 149 400 121 950 86 250 149 400 121 950 86 250

31.8 mm kg. 26 080 45 180 36 880 26 080 67 770 55 320 39 120 67 770 55 320 39 120

1 1/2 in. lbs. 80 000 138 500 113 000 80 000

38.1 mm kg. 36 290 62 820 51 260 36 290

1 3/4 in. lbs. 100 000 73 200 41 000 100 000

44.5 mm kg. 45 360 78 560 63 960 45 360

2 in. lbs. 130 000 225 000 183 000 130 000

50.8 mm kg. 26 750 102 060 83 000 26 750

Fig. 10Steel Alloy Chains

Keep hands and fingers from between the chain and load.

Avoid shock loading -- particularly when working at temperatures below 40F [4 C].

Never pull chain from under load when load is resting on chain.

Correct kinks and twisting in chain before lifting.

Lift from center of hooks. Avoid lifting from the point.

Assure that load is free to move before lifting. Keep clear of all obstructions.

When using a basket hitch, balance load and assure that chain legs containor support load from the sides above the center of gravity.

Store chains in an area where they will not be subject to mechanical damageor corrosive action.


CABLE SLINGS

Select the appropriate size wire rope and hitch. See Table below.

CABLESIZE

ESTIMATEDRATING CA-

PACITY(For Exact

Rating CheckSling Tag)

VERTICAL CHOKERHITCH

BASKETHITCH 60 45 30

1/4 in. lbs. 980 740 1400 1700 1400 980

6.4 mm kg. 445 335 635 770 635 445

1/2 in. lbs. 3600 2800 5200 6400 5200 3600

712.7 mm kg. 1630 1270 2360 2900 2360 1630

3/4 in. lbs. 7800 5800 11100 13600 11100 7800

19.1 mm kg. 3450 2630 5035 6170 5035 3450

1 in. lbs. 13400 1000 18800 22000 18800 13400

25.4 mm kg. 6080 4540 8530 9980 8530 6080

1 1/4 in. lbs. 19600 14800 28000 34000 28000 19600

31.8 mm kg. 8890 6710 12700 15420 12700 6710

1 1/2 in. lbs. 28000 20000 40000 48000 40000 28000

38.1 mm kg. 12700 9070 18140 21770 18140 12700

1 3/4 in. lbs. 38000 28000 54000 66000 54000 38000

44.5 mm kg. 17240 12700 24490 29940 24490 17240

2 in. lbs. 50000 36000 70000 86000 70000 50000

50.8 mm kg. 22680 16330 31750 39000 31750 22680

Fig. 11Wire Rope Slings

Guide loads with a tag line when practical.

When using multiple leg sling, select longest one possible.

Examine for damaged or worn area.

Attach securely to load.

Pad sharp corners to protect wire rope.

Center load in the base (bowl) of the hook to prevent hook point loading.

Do not kink, twist, or loop legs.

Keep hands and fingers from between wire rope and load.

Stand clear of attached load.

Start lift slowly to avoid shock injury.

Do not pull wire rope from under a load when the load is resting on it.

Do not shorten sling by knotting, by wire rope clips, or by any other means.

Do not inspect wire rope by passing bare hands over the body. Broken wire,if present, may puncture the hands.

Keep wire rope well--lubricated to prevent corrosion.

Use gloves at all times when handling.


SYNTHETIC MATERIAL SLINGS

Select the sling with the suitable characteristics and capability for the loadand environment. See Fig. 12.

Fig. 12Sling Load Angle Chart

RATED SLING CAPACITY--ONE LEG

SLINGLIFTING

EFFICIENCY

100.0 %

96.6 %

86.6 %

70.7 %

50.0 %

1000[454

1000[454

1000[454

1000[454

1000[454

1000[454

968[439

866[390

707[320

500[225

SLING--TO--LOAD ANGLE IS ALWAYSTHE ANGLE BETWEEN THE SLING LEG ANDTHE HORIZONTAL SURFACE.

AS THE SLING TO LOAD ANGLEDECREASES, SO DOES THE RATED CA-PACITY OF A SLING.

90

75

60

45

30

USE THIS CHARTFOR ALL TYPESLINGS; ROPE,CHAIN, OR NYLON.

If Sling Ca-pacity

at 90 is...(LB. [KG])

Then ActualSling Capacity

is ...(LB. [KG])

SLINGTOANGLE

LOAD

]

]

]

]

]

]

]

]

]

]

When using a choker hitch, the sling shall be long enough to assure that thechoking action is on the webbing.

Slings used in a basket hitch shall have the load balanced.

Do not drag slings over the floor or any abrasive surface.

Do not twist or tie knots in slings.

Never pull sling from load when the load is resting on it.

Protect sling from sharp corners and abrasive surfaces.

Do not drop slings.

Store slings in an area where they will not be subject to mechanical orchemical damage.

Do not use where acid conditions exist.

Do not use polyester and polypropylene slings where caustic conditionsexist.

Do not use polyester and nylon slings at temperatures in excess of 180F nor polypropylene slings at temperatures in excess of 200 F.

Do not use aluminum fittings where caustic conditions exist.


P TYPE HOOKS

P type hooks are a proprietary design and should be considered for heavy(machine and unit) lifts.

Fig. 14 gives dimensional data, safe working loads and screw torque valuesfor P type hooks.

The use of these hooks must be shown on the assembly drawing, listed inthe Bill of Material and shown in the lifting section of the Service Manual.

F

E

A

DC

B

Fig. 13“P” Type Lifting Hooks

PARTLIFTING SCREW SCREW

PARTNO.

CAPACITY A B C D E F SCREW NO. QTY. TORQUE TORQUENO.

LBS. [KG] INCH INCH INCH INCH INCH INCH LB./FT. N--m

402517 1800 [818] 2.00 9.75 4.50 3.00 2.50 -- -- -- 2415 2 160 217

296513 2500 [1136] 1.75 10.63 4.00 2.50 4.00 -- -- -- 2415 2 160 217

296514 3500 [1590] 2.00 12.25 4.50 3.00 2.50 5.00 2415 3 160 217

402335 5000 [2273] 2.25 12.25 4.50 3.00 5.00 -- -- -- 180139 2 370 502

296515 8000 [3636] 2.25 15.75 4.50 3.00 4.00 7.88 180139 3 370 502

WHEN DESIGNING METRIC SIZES SEE THE CURRENT LIFTING MANUAL

Fig. 14“P” Type Lifting Hooks

S HOOKS

The use of S hooks in conjunction with some of the other lifting devicesdictates additional safety rules which must always be practiced.

Never use more than one S hook in a single chain link or hook.

Inspect the S hook before each use and if damaged destroy by cutting intotwo pieces.

Never exceed the safe working load which should be stamped on each hook.

Do not paint, weld, or expose an S hook to high heat.


Do not use when either or both S hooks are opened more than 15% of thenormal throat opening or twisted more than 10 from the plane of theunbent hook.

B

C

C

R (REF.)

A

STAMP TOINDICATE ALLOY

STAMP MFGR. NAME OR TRADEMARK FORIDENTIFICATION

STAMP WORKING LOAD LIMIT WITH LOW STRESSCHARACTERS PER NUCLEAR AMERICANSOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS CODESECTION III, DIV. 1, PARAGRAPH NA--3766.6 (2)

Fig. 15“S” Hooks

MAX. WORKING

LOADMANUFACTURER AND

ALL DIMENSIONS ININCHES

(See Fig 16.)

S--HOOK

WEIGHT

PART NO. LBS. KG CODE NUMBER A B C R LBS.

3590535--5 650 294 CM Chain 562250 0.500 7.50 2.00 1.00 0.80

Amer. Chain & Cable 5933--00800 0.500 5.50 1.50 0.75 0.63

3590535--7 1 015 460 CM Chain 562262 0.625 9.00 2.50 1.25 1.60

Amer. Chain & Cable 5933--01000 0.625 7.00 1.88 0.94 1.30

3590535--8 1 465 664 CM Chain 562275 0.750 10.50 3.00 1.50 2.60

Amer. Chain & Cable 5933--01200 0.750 8.25 2.25 1.12 2.10

3590535--9 1 990 902 CM Chain 562287 0.875 12.00 3.50 1.75 4.20

Amer. Chain & Cable 5933--01400 0.875 9.62 2.62 1.31 3.40

3590535--10 2 600 1179 CM Chain 562300 1.000 13.00 4.00 2.00 6.00

Amer. Chain & Cable 5933--01600 1.000 11.00 3.00 1.50 5.10

3590535--12 3 290 1492 CM Chain 562310--B 1.125 15.00 4.50 2.25 8.70

Amer. Chain & Cable 5933--01800 1.125 12.12 3.38 1.69 7.00

3590535--14 4 065 1843 CM Chain 562325--B 1.250 16.00 5.00 2.50 11.70

Amer. Chain & Cable 5933--02000 1.250 13.75 3.75 1.88 10.00

3590535--15 4 915 2229 CM Chain 562337--B 1.375 17.00 5.50 2.75 15.40

Amer. Chain & Cable 5933--02200 1.375 14.88 4.12 2.06 13.00

3590535--16 5 850 2653 CM Chain 562350--B 1.500 18.00 6.00 3.00 19.50

Amer. Chain & Cable 5933--02400 1.500 16.50 4.50 2.25 17.50

3590535--18 9 500 4309 Amer. Chain & Cable 5933--02800 1.750 19.25 5.25 2.62 28.00

3590535--20 12 500 5669 Amer. Chain & Cable 5933--03200 2.000 22.00 6.00 6.00 41.00

3590535--25 19 000 8618 Amer. Chain & Cable 5933--04000 2.500 27.50 7.50 9.75 79.00

Fig. 16“S” Hooks


U TYPE HOOKS

U type hooks are a proprietary design and should be considered for heavy(machine and unit) lifts.

Fig. 17 and Fig. 18 give dimensional data, safe working loads and screwtorque values for U type hooks.

The use of these hooks must be shown on the assembly drawing, listed inthe Bill of Material and shown in the lifting section of the Service Manual.

A

B

D

C

Fig. 17“U” Type Lifting Hooks

LIFTING SCREW SCREW

PART NO. CAPACITY A B C D TORQUE TORQUE

LB. [KG] in in in in SCREW NO. QTY. LB./FT. N--m

303427 1 500 [680} 2.75 4.00 2.25 1.25 3248 2 45 61

303429 3 500 [1587] 3.25 4.50 2.50 1.50 2400 2 90 122

301269 6 000 [2720] 4.00 6.00 3.75 2.00 2415 2 160 217

301270 8 000 [3600} 5.00 6.50 3.88 2.25 180139 2 570 502

301271 12 000 [5442] 6.00 8.00 4.50 2.50 308196---3 2 735 997

301272 16 000 [7256] 7.00 9.50 5.30 3.00 308197---4 2 1290 1749

311105 25 000 [11 337] 7.00 14.25 6.00 3.50 308197---4 2 1290 1749

LB. [KG] mm mm mm mm SCREW NO. QTY. N--m LB./FT.

990819 1 500 [680] 75 107 60 32.0 1234074 2 41 30

3988405 3 000 [1360] 90 120 65 38.0 1234100 2 108 80

3990821 6 000 [2720] 105 155 95 50.0 1400264 2 230 170

5024235 8 000 [3600] 130 180 103 57.2 1400400 2 407 300

5025776 14 000 [6500] 170 250 133 76.2 6010088--3 2 1356 1000

5026032 22 500 [10 200] 300/180 380 159 88.9 6010088--3 4 1356 1000

Fig. 18“U” Lifting Hook Table


GENERAL SAFETY LIFTING INFORMATION

All hooks or cranes or any other type lifting device should be equipped witha safety latch (see Fig. 19) similar to the one manufactured by theHarrington Co., Plymouth Meeting, Pennsylvania.

Fig. 19Safety Latch

Illustrations or descriptions of any special lifting devices or techniquesrequired for servicing components of a specific machine are found in thesection dealing with the particular component.

Always contact the nearest Cincinnati Machine representative if there areany questions regarding the lifting of any machine components.


Fluids Used With Machine Tools

General Considerations

Various fluid products, such as cutting fluids, lubricants, etc., are used withthis machine tool. The correct type and quantity is identified by instructionplates on the machine and/or written instructions in the supplied manual(s).

Before using fluids or related products not specifically approved orrecommended with this machine tool, the owner/user should contact theauthorized supplier, closest Cincinnati Machine regional field office forassistance in determining if the product is suitable for the particularapplication.

Lubricants

Only those lubricants (oils and greases) tested and approved by CincinnatiMachine, should be used in Cincinnati machine tools. For informationconcerning latest lubricants manual, contact Cincinnati Machine servicedepartment.

Cutting Fluids

Before filling the machine, ensure that the product is suitable for theapplication. Frequently, check for storage, tank unit or hose leaks.

Watermixed fluids that contain emulsifiersmust beprotected fromfreezing.

Cutting fluid products should be tailored to each machine tool applicationand workpiece requirement for maximum efficiency. See WARNING.

For assistance in determining the correct cutting fluid, contact nearestCincinnati Machine Service Department.

Sources Of Information -- USA

Beforeusingany fluidproductwith thismachine tool, theowner/user shouldrequest a Technical Data Product Safety Sheet (for example: OSHA Form20 or a similar technical data information sheet) from the productmanufacturer. This data should include the following:

Fire and Explosion Hazard Chemical and Trade NameData Acute Toxicity PropertiesSpill or Leak Procedures Hazardous IngredientsSpecial Protective Information Physical DataSpecial Precautions Recommended Dilutions

WARNING

CUTTING FLUIDS

When soluble coolantsare used, it is important toensure that recom-mended concentrationlevels are maintained.

Failure to follow this In-struction can cause cor-rosion of safety criticalparts, resulting in ma-chine damage and/or per-sonal injury.


Listed below are some other sources which can be contacted to obtainadditional up--to--date information concerning the safe use, handling,storage and disposal of products, materials, chemicals or substances.

Occupational Safety and Health Resource Conservation andAct (OSHA) Public Law Recovery Act (RCRA) Public Law

Department of Transportation National Institute for(DOT) Hazard Classification— Occupational Safety andThe Transportation Safety Act Health (NIOSH)

Product Safety Data Sheet Cincinnati MachineToxic Substances Control Act P.O. Box 9013(TSCA) Public Law Cincinnati, Ohio 45209

Federal Insecticide, Fungicide and American National StandardsRodenticide Act (FIFRA) Public Institute, Inc. (ANSI)Law

American Conference ofEnvironmental Protection Agency Governmental Industrial

Hygienists,Threshold Limit

Federal Hazardous Substances Act Values

Clean Water Act

After receiving the data, analyze and perform the necessary procedures toassure the safe handling, storage, use and disposal of the product.Emergency/First Aid procedures and training should be readily available topersonnel handling or using productswhich maybe hazardous (flammable),harmful (toxic) and/or reactive (unstable)

The owner/user should become familiar with and keep informed on allregulated materials or substances. Copies of the latest regulated materialmay be obtained from agencies, such as NIOSH, Registry of Toxic Effectsfor Chemical Substances, U.S. Department of Health Education andWelfare, Public Health Service, Center for Disease Control, and theNational Institute for Occupational Safety and Health.

Usage Information

Products must not be mixed with other products unless permission and/orinstructionshavebeengrantedby themanufacturer(s). Product concentratesmust be mixed and diluted exactly as instructed by the manufacturer for aparticular approved application.

All product CAUTION, WARNING and DANGER labels, tags and printedinstructions accompanying the products must be read and followed Thisinstruction shall remain with the product at all times. Additional productinstruction labels, signs, etc., should be acquired and displayed withconcentrates that are purchased in bulk and then dispensed in small ordiluted quantities


Cutting Fluids -- Preventative Maintenance

See Cautions 1 and 2

Cutting fluids are designed to cool and lubricate the tool tip while in a cut.There are many types of cutting fluids, some of which may cause variousproblems on a machining center tool, such as corrosion, bacteria build--up,solid formations of chips and cutting debris, etc. if incorrectly applied.

The user should be aware of these potential problems, and guard againstthem.

Two types of cutting fluids can be used on this machine, semi--synthetics,and emulsions. Each has its own advantages and disadvantages and the usershould consider all of them when making a product selection.

Water Quality

Water is the major ingredient in a water--based cutting fluid. Its importancein product performance cannot be ignored.

Corrosion, residue, scum, rancidity, foam, excess concentrate use, in factalmost any cutting fluid performance problem may be caused by the qualityof the water used in making the mix.

Too Soft

When the mix water has a total hardness of less that 75ppm, the cutting fluidmay foam -- especially in applicationswhere there is agitation. Foamcausesproblems when it overflows the reservoir, the machining center, the returntrenches, etc. Foam may also interfere with settling type separators, obscurethe workpiece, and diminish the cooling capacity of a water--based cuttingfluid. Generally, all products foam more readily in soft water.

Too Hard

Hard water, when combined with some water--based cutting fluids,promotes the formation of insoluble soaps. The dissolved minerals in thewater combine with anionic emulsifiers in the cutting fluid concentrate toform these insoluble compounds that appear as a scum in the mix. Suchscum coats the sides of the reservoir, clogs the pipes and filters, coversmachining centers with a sticky residue, and may cause sticking gauges,pushbuttons, selector switches, and other similar devices.

Hard water can promote corrosion of machine components and shouldalways be eliminated. De--ionized water will help deal with the problem ofhard water, provided advice has been sought.

Cleaning The Coolant Reservoir

The system requires periodic attention and servicing. The reservoir shouldbe drained and cleaned periodically to remove sediments and preventconditions that lead to deterioration of the coolant. The reservoir can becleaned by removing the used fluid before adding and circulating acommercial cleaner or as required by adding a suitable cleaner to the usedcoolant in the machining center during a shut--down period while themachine is cycling. Specific cleaning procedures should be supplied on thelabel of each cleaning product.

CAUTION 1

COOLANTS

It is not recommended thatneat mineral oils be used asa cutting fluid for this ma-chine.

Failure to heed this warningcould seriously impair the ef-ficiency of both the coolantand swarf removal systems.

CAUTION 2

COOLANTS

It is not recommended thatcoolants having a high de-mulsification factor, be usedwith this machine.

Such coolants must bechecked for compatabilitywith the oils and greases rec-ommended for use with thismachine.

Failure to follow this instruc-tion can lead to lubricationproblems, resulting in dam-age to the machine.


Lifespan

The lifespan of cutting fluids varies widely and depends on many factors.The basic type of coolant, the hardness of the water, the types of metal in thecoolant tank, the cleanliness of the system, and the amount of tramp oil inthe fluid, all are factors that affect lifespan.

Tramp Oil

Tramp oils need to be controlled. Tramp oils in the coolant mix cause avarying degree of degradation of the coolant quality.

Minimize the leakage of oils into the system through proper maintenance ofseals and lubricant systems. If excess quantities of oils leak into the system,the metalworking fluid performance can be reduced. Lubricating andhydraulic oils contain food for bacteria. They may also blanket the fluid,excluding air, and thereby provide ideal conditions for the growth of odorproducing bacteria. If allowed to build up, extraneous oil causes smokingand increases residue around the machining center area.

The elimination of tramp oils is even more important if chemical cuttingfluids are used. Hydraulic oil is a contaminant that must be kept out of thecutting fluid. Hydraulic oils, and particularly some of the additivesformulated into them,cancause seriousdamage to themachine tool andcutting fluid when mixed with water.

If trampoil build--up shouldbecomea problem,various commercial devicesare available to remove it.

Filtering

The cleanliness of the coolant is very important in regards to the reliabilityof the various coolant valves, tubing, etc. This Machining Center isequipped with a coolant filter system. It is good practice to ensure that anyfilters are kept in good operating condition.

Rust Prevention

When a machining center tool is sitting idle for a period, the possibility ofcorrosion increases. There are certain precautions that the user must take toprevent damage to the precision ground surfaces on this machine tool.Under certain conditions, damage can occur within as little time as a day ortwo; therefore, it is important that proper precautions be carried out.

If the machining center is going to sit idle for a period, it is important to wipeall the coolant off the slideways and then protect them with a goodrust--preventive. On the horizontal axes of the machining center, it may benecessary to run the slidesbackand forth anumberof times,wiping thewayseach time, until no coolant is seen originating from under the slide.

After the coolant is clear from under the slide, spray the rust--preventive onthe waysand move the slide again, taking the rust--preventiveback under theslide.


Printed Circuit Board Handling Instructions

General

All integrated circuits are susceptible to electro--static discharge damage.Because of this condition, special procedures must be used when handlingcircuit boards containing integrated circuits, even though there is nocompletely foolproof system of protecting integrated circuits. Metal oxidesemi--conductor (MOS) assemblies manufactured byVickers ElectronicSystems Division Incorporated are supplied with a caution sticker. Refer tothe sticker and the information concerning cautions and warnings in thesupplied literature.

NOTE: It is important to emphasize that electro--static discharge to a PCBoard may not completely destroy an assembly component, butseverely de--grade this component to a point where intermittentfailures may occur.

If static discharge occurs at sufficient magnitude (2kV or greater) damageor degradation will usually occur if recommended handling procedures arenot used. Personnel handling equipment in a low humidity environment cangenerate static potentials in excess of 10kV. Do not touch any integratedcircuit assemblies at the pins, leads or edge connectors, since most damageis done at these points. See WARNING 1.

Recommended Handling Procedure

Before removing or replacing any PC Board, a qualified technician mustdisconnect all electrical power, including battery back--up devices. Referto the machine dedicated electrical diagrams. See WARNING 2.

A recommended procedure before handling printed circuit boards is asfollows:

1. Attach a grounded ”wrist strap” in contact with the skin. This strapshould have a resistor value of 1 megohm (1/2 watt) in series withthe person and grounded to leak off electro--static discharge.

2. When working with static control devices (for example: a bag orpad), touch the device with your grounded hand. This action willplace you and the static control device assembly at the sameelectro--static potential.

Store and transport the printed circuit boards in static control bags. Use”shorting bars” or conductive foam materials. Do not use a suspected staticdamaged printed circuit board. See WARNING 3.

Below are examples of electro--static caution symbols which may appear inareas of concern (for example: packing, shipping or receiving). Thesesymbols signify that the ”Recommended Handling Procedures” must beused and/or follow any special supplied instruction.

WARNING 1

Do not expose PC Boards toelectro--static discharge,as intermittent board fail-ures may occur and causeerratic machine operation.Failure to follow thisinstruction may result inpersonal injury.

WARNING 2

Qualified electrical person-nel must disconnect allelectrical power beforeprinted circuit boards arereplaced. Failure to followthis instruction may resultin personal injury.

WARNING 3

Do not set PC Boards instyrofoam, waxed, rubber,plastic or other high ratednon--conductive (dielectric)materials. Failure to followthis instruction may resultin personal injury.


Safety Features

Perimeter Guarding

A complete set of perimeter guards is supplied and fitted to this machine.See WARNING 1.

OPERATOR ACCESS TO THE MACHINE is gained at the followingpoint(s):--

1. Operator Door -- for loading and unloading components and forsetting up purposes.

Operator Sliding Door(s)

See WARNING 2.

With the door(s) closed and machine power on, a safety switch is actuatedthat allows automatic machine movements to be executed.

It is not possible to open the operator door/s while the machine is inautomatic cycle, due to the latching mechanism of the switch.

With the door(s) open and machine power on, the following conditionsapply:

With the door(s) open and machine power on, the following functions areavailable under HOLD TO RUN control.

S Spindle rotation is inhibited.

S Power feed of the X and Z axes are limited to 2m/min maximum.

The following functions are also available for selection.

1. Coolant Start.

2. Tailstock quill movement.

3. Spindle chuck open/close.

WARNING 1

PERIMETER GUARDING

It is imperative that thisguarding is kept intactand in place at all timesduring normal operationof the machine.

In such cases where thepart of the guarding hasto be removed for mainte-nance purposes, theguarding MUST be re-placed before the ma-chine is allowed to goback into normal opera-tion.


WARNING 2

OPERATOR DOORPOWER LOSS

If machine power is lostwhile the door is in itsclosed position, it will re-main latched in that posi-tion until power is re--ap-plied.

The door can be openedfrom the inside using thespecial key attached to theunderside of the SHOTBOLT body. Do not attemptto operate the machine withthis door open.



Feed Hold Push Button

Provides logical and safe interruption of the active machine cycle whenactuated.

Emergency Stop Push Button

See CAUTION.

Provides fastest practical elimination of machine movements (spindle, axesand mechanisms, etc.).

Electrical Isolation Device (Main Disconnect Switch)

A lockable isolation switch is provided on the main electrical cabinet.See DANGER.

It should also be noted that it may take up to 20 minutes to dischargecompletely the capacitors mounted in the servo drives.

Air Supply Isolation Valve

A pneumatic isolation valve is required to be provided by the customer toallow for the removal of air power from the machine.

Metric Lifting Points

This machine has been manufactured to utilise “METRIC” thread liftingdevices. Any exception to this will be labelled adjacent to the lift point.

CAUTIONEmergency Stop

Actuating this button with themachine in a cutting cyclemay damage cutting toolsand work pieces.

Failure to follow this instruc-tion may result in damage toequipment.

DANGER

The ELECTRICAL ISOLA-TION switch does NOT iso-late the incoming supply tothe electrical cabinet or thesupply to the transformerunit. Use extreme care whenworking near the power in-put leads. Severe shock inju-ry can result if the leads aretouched.

Failure to follow this instruc-tion may result in death orserious personal injury.


Machine Related Safety And Usage Notes

Axis Overtravel Condition

Care should be taken when power feeding an axis out of axis overtravelcondition, to ensure that the direction selected brings the axis away from theovertravel condition. If the wrong direction is selected it is possible to drivethe axis further into overtravel which could result in damage to the machine.

Safe Operation Of Lathe Chucks

Ensure the chuck is of good condition as damage may impede its safefunction especialy at high speeds.

Maximum operating speeds for chucks are for guidance only and attentionshould be made to the size and shape of the workpiece and tooling.

The influence of centrifugal force may result in the work piece becominginsucurely gripped under certain conditions. As the factors vary widelywitheach particular application we are unable to provide specific figures forgeneral use, but the following should be observed;

1. Speed for an application

2. Weight and type of jaws if non--standard

3. Radius at which jaws are operating

4. Condition of chuck

5. State of balance

6. Magnitude of the cutting forces

7. Clamping force applied to the work--piece

When a manual chuck or fixture is used, remove the clamping handle fromthe chuck or fixture after tightening and before operating/rotating thespindle or moving the axes.

Work Holding Devices

Always support the work--piece using the correct work holding device, eg.chucks, steadrests and centres.

Care should be taken to support work--piece when clamping/unclamping.

Safe maximum speed of rotation should be observed, as determined by thework holding device manufacturer.

Bar stock protruding from the end of the headstock should be adequatelysupported at all times. See Warning 2.

WARNING 1


WARNING 2

Inadequately supportedbar--stock protrudingfrom the headstock maycause whipping. Ensurethe material is correctlysupported at all times.



General Operation

Loosen tool holder/cutting tool bolts gradually. Keep stable footing and donot overtighten these bolts. Check with the manufacture for properre--torquing values.

Securely tighten all tool holders, tools chuck jaws. Balancing of these itemsmay be necessary. Check with the manufacture for proper re--torquingvalues.

Always use two spanners to lock cutting tools into a ’Driven Head’ toolholder. One spanner is located on the rotating spindle unit within the headwhilst the other locates on the spindle locknut, see Fig. 20.

Fig. 20Driven Head Tool Holder

Never attempt to lock or unlock a tool in a Driven Head when the head ismounted in a tool station on the turret. See CAUTION.

Always use a bench mounted propriety Tightening Fixture to lock andunlock a tool from a Driven Head tool holder. For details, see manufacturerscatalogue.

A tool holder or a plastic blanking plug should be present in each of the turrettool stations. Blanking plugs (shown in Figure 32) are recommended tooccupy turret stations not in use to prevent the ingress swarf and coolant, etc.See manufacturers catalogue.

Lower the spindle speed when changing the speed range while the spindleis rotating.

Do not insert bar stock into a rotating spindle. The bar stock length shouldbe shorter than the spindle‘s length.

Bar stock must be straight in order to prevent vibration.

Do not attempt to remove chips if the spindle, turret or any machinecomponent is in motion.

WARNING


CAUTION

Attempting to lock or unlock atool in a Driven Head toolholder whilst it is mounted ina turret station may cause ex-cessive torsional strain in thespindle drive mechanism.

Failure to follow this instruc-tion could result in seriousdamage to the drive tang onthe Driven Head tool holderand drive mechanism.


Check that the cycle is complete (Cycle Start indicator is not illuminated)and the machine is in a Feedhold condition before attempting to unload/loada workpiece.

Before starting the machine operation (machining), check hydraulicpressures, lubricating oil pressures, compressed air pressure--if present, andchuck pressure to make sure all gauges indicate proper values.

Battery Replacement

The battery installed in the control unit will provide backup for the memorycontent for approximately 12 months. If an alarm message is displayed onthe screen replace the battery as soon as possible. For the correct batteryreplacement procedure refer to the control manufacturers operating manual.

FANUC alarm message “BAT”.

Lithium Batteries

Lithium batteries contain the hazardous chemical lithium --an extremelyactive chemical requiring special handling and disposal. The followingguidelines should be observed when handling lithium batteries:

Lithium batteries are not rechargeable.

Do not allow lithium batteries to be heated above 212 degrees F (100degrees C).

Do not incinerate lithium batteries.

Do not expose lithium batteries to water. Water may cause a violentreaction.

Do not try to disassemble lithium batteries. Direct contact with themetal causes severe chemical burns.

Because of the hazardous nature of lithium, disposal must be madeaccording to applicable federal, state, and local regulations.

WARNING

Improper handling of lith-ium batteries may causethe batteries to explode,spraying caustic metal,and causing severechemical burns.Failure to follow thisinstruction may result inserious personal injury.


Chapter 2System Information

Fig. 21Hawk Turning Center

Introduction

The CINCINNATI HAWK range of Turning Centers is a general purposecold metal turning machine, which use non--rotating tools with an indexingturret.

The machine has two sliding axes and tool turret indexing capability allunder numerical control.

The turning center has been designed to automatically index tools in orderto carry out turning, drilling, threading, boring and reaming operations.

All functions of the machine may be controlled by the NC program, with theminimum of operator attention being required.

The perimeter guarding provided, ensures the safety of personnel againstmoving parts, coolant, swarf and broken tooling, when the above operationsare being undertaken. See WARNING. See also GUARD STRENGTH.

WARNING

MISUSE OF THE MACHINE

The machine must not beadapted to carry out anyform of MILLING or GRIND-ING operations, as its de-sign and construction doesnot allow for these to beperformed safely.

Failure to heed this warningcould result in serious per-sonal injury if not death.


Guard Strength

The guards of this machine are designed to prevent access to hazardousmoving parts and to contain the ejection of tool or work--piece fragments upto a calculated maximum energy level.

For Hawk 150 machines the maximum energy level is 2480 Joules.This is equivalent to a mass of 1.25 kg ejected from the work area and havingan impact speed of 63 m/s.

For Hawk 200/250 machines the maximum energy level is 8000 Joules.This is equivalent to a mass of 2.5 kg ejected from the work area andhaving an impact speed of 80 m/s.

See WARNING 1.

WARNING 1

GUARD STRENGTH

For safe use of thismachine the guards mustbe in place and properlymaintained. Care must betaken to ensure that cut-ters are applied withintheir designed safe speedand that any separatecomponent parts of cut-ters are securely clampedprior to application.

Failure to follow this in-struction may result in se-rious personal injury.


Noise

Noise level for this machine is within a maximum of 80 dB(A).

The operating conditions used to determine this figure were as follows:

1. Machine correctly installed, clear of all nearby reflecting surfaces withall guards fitted and closed.

2. Noise Measurement positions 1.6m high at operator’s work--stationand at six equi--spaced positions along a peripheral path 1.0 from theouter surface of the machine.

3. Noise levels measured using an integrating sound level meter.

4. Machine warmed prior to testing by running for at least 30 minutes ata spindle speed of 66% of max RPM.

5. A--weighted time--averaged emission sound pressure levels measuredat each position under the following conditions:

5.1 Machine stopped (hydraulics off) to get background pressurelevel. Levels recorded in dB(A) using ’slow’ setting.

5.2 Spindle running at maximum speed with chuck jaws gripping adummy workpiece. Emission pressure levels, Lpeqθ recorded indB(A) using ’slow’ setting.

5.3 Machine performing turning operation as detailed in clause 6.2below, with time--averaged emission pressure levels beingrecorded, Lpeqθ.

6. Operating conditions:

6.1 Mode 1: Running Light Test

Spindle Speed: 5500rpm (Hawk 150)Workpiece: 34mm diameter (dummy)Workpiece holding: 3 jaw chuck

6.2 Mode 2: Prescribed Turning Test

Workpiece: EN 302Workpiece dimensions: 155mm long, 70mm diameterWorkpiece holding: 3 jaw chuckTooling type: Indexable insert, sintered carbide,

rhomboidalTooling geometry: Nose radius: 0.8 mm; Back rake: +9

Cutting edge angle: 95Spindle speed: 1000 rpmFeedrate: 250 mm/minDepth of cut: 2.0 mmMetal removal rate: 110 cm3/minLength of cut: 113 mmDuration: 27s


7. All noise emission values corrected for background level.

8. Noise declaration

DECLARED SINGLE--NUMBER NOISE EMISSION VALUES inaccordance with ISO 4871, LpAd

Maximum A--weighted emission sousnd pressure level LpAd, (ref.20←Pa)at theoperator’spositionoranyperipheralposition, indecibels:

Mode 1: Running light at max. spindle speed: 80Mode 2: Under prescribed operating conditions: 77

9. The operating conditions described herein are considered to beadequately representative of the product, and reflect prevailing usage.Noise levels, under different operating conditions, may, however,exceed the limits quoted, and could under extreme conditionsnecessitate the use of ear protection equipment. See WARNING.

Fumes And Coolant Misting

Extraction equipment can be fitted to the machine. When machiningmaterials which might produce fumes or result in coolant misting, noteshould be taken of local health and safety regulations.

Fire Hazard

The machine has not been designed to cater for materials which, as a resultof the machining application, could combust. It is the owner’s/user’sresponsibility in these circumstances to conform with local safety regula-tions for handling and machining such materials.

Should further advice be required on any of the above items the requestshould be forwarded to one of the offices detailed at the front of this manual.

Machine Location -- See Caution

EMC Directive Requirements

This machine satisfies the EMC Directive by conforming to genericemissions and immunity standards for the INDUSTRIAL ENVIRON-MENT ONLY.

Install the machine in a clean, well lighted area. Ambient temperaturesshould remain relatively constant to maintain accurate alignment betweencomponents, and there should be enough air space around the machine todissipate heat built up during operation. Avoid particularly a location nearshipping doors, etc. where air temperatures in winter can fluctuate widely.

Ensure there will be enough room around the machine to access itscomponents for maintenance and operation. Suitable lifting devices will berequired for assembly, servicing , and loading/unloading of workpieces.

WARNING

NOISE LEVEL

Running the machine athigh speeds with chuckjaws wide open, could gen-erate noise of a leveldeemed to be injurious tothe hearing of operators orbystanders. Under suchcircumstances the use ofhearing protection is re-quired.

Failure to heed this warningcould result in serious per-sonal injury.

CAUTION

Avoid locating the machinenear welding , electrical, ormagnetic generating equip-ment. Possible generatingelectrical noise may result inmachine control interfer-ence.



NC Control

The machine operating station is mounted and positioned at the front of themachine guarding, Protect the control from dust and extremes oftemperature and humidity.

Machine Information

The machine and control are integrated to comprise an efficientmanufactur-ing system. Thus, machining cycles can be completely automatic, includingtool selection, toolpositioning, selectionof spindle speedsandcutting feeds,coolant control with other related auxiliary functions and/or combinationsof control. The machine and controls are completely compatible, eachtaking advantage of the capabilities of the other.

The basic machine consists of the following units:

Fixed baseFixed headstock/spindleSliding saddle (Z axis)Sliding turret (X axis)Multi--station indexing turretHydraulic chuck and cylinderHydraulic tailstockComputer Numerical Control StationElectrical CabinetChip/Coolant TrayPerimeter Guards

Bed/Base Unit The bed/base unit is the main structure of the Turning Center. In addition to. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .providing rigidity and support for the sliding members, machine alignmentis maintained through the strength of this structure.The unit houses the following;

Spindle drive motorHydraulic tank and pump unit -- bolted to the Left Hand endof the Bed/Base unit.Electrical Cabinet

Headstock Spindle Unit The headstock spindle unit contains the necessary components to drive the. . . . . . . . . . . .spindle through range of speeds in one (1) RPM increments. The spindle ispowered by a motor whose speed selection is accomplished via CNC.

Saddle The sliding saddle provides the Z axis travel.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Turret The turret is located on the saddle. The turret provides the X axis travel and. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .also carries the multi--station indexing turret.

Chip / coolant tray The chip tray is positioned under the base at the front of the machine.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Coolant tank L shaped, lying across the front and Right hand end of the machine. The unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .houses the coolant pump.

WARNING

In order to clearly showdetails of this machine,some covers, shields,doors or guards have ei-ther been removed orshown in an ’open’ posi-tion. All such protectivedevices shall be installedin position before operat-ing this machine.

Failure to follow this in-struction may result indamage to machine com-ponents and/or personalinjury


Axis Orientation

Fig. 22Axis Orientation -- Hawk Turning Centre

+C +Z-Z

-X

+X

The axis orientation photograph enables the operator to affix in his mind theconventional slide directions of movement for the turning center. Thephotograph is for axis orientation only and does not represent themechanical zero reference points for these axes.


Hawk Specification

Units 150 200 250

ChuckTurn length max mm 440 540 690. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Jaw chuck diameter max mm 210 254 304. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

max swing over bed mm 400 530 530. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .max turn diameter (STD tooling) mm 240 300 350. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Bar chuck capacity mm 51 65 77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Axis Travel RangesTurret slide (X axis) mm 215 245 270. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Saddle (Z axis) mm 440 540 690. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SpindleAC Drive Motor continuous rated kW 5.5 11 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

duty rated kW 7.5 15 18.5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Spindle speed max rpm. 5500 4500 3300. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Nose . A2--5 A2--6 A2--8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Bearing type . A/C A/C A/C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Bearing size -- Bore mm. 90 110 130. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Linear Axis Feedrates and ThrustFeedrate Z m/min 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

X m/min 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Rapid rate Z m/min 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

X m/min 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Axis thrust Z kN 5.6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

X kN 4.0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Accuracies -- Uni--directionalPositioning Z mm �0.004. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

X mm �0.002. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Axis repeatability Z mm �0.001. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

X mm �0.0005. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ToolingTurret positions 12 12 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Index time per station s 0.2 0.3 0.3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Tooling type (Standard) V.D.I.30 V.D.I.40 V.D.I.40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TailstockQuill diameter mm 65 95 95. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Quill stoke mm 101 127 127. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Quill thrust kN 4.5 7.8 7.8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Quill taper 4 M.T 5M.T 5M.T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Hawk Specification Units 150 200 250

CNC SystemModel and type FANUC 21i. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Manufacturer G.E. FANUC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Number of contouring axes ONE (X Axis). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lubrication SystemAxes ballscrew nuts grease P64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .X,Y,Z axis way bearings grease P64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Spindle bearing lubrication pre--greased sealed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Coolant SystemCoolant delivery system -- Low Pressure at 0.9 Bar l/min 20. . . . . . . . . .Coolant delivery system -- High Pressure at 5.2 Bar l/min 20. . . . . . . . . .Head m 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Tank capacity without conveyor l 135 177 190. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

with conveyor l 155 205 218. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Hydraulic SystemOil specification P38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Tank capacity l 45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Air RequirementAir supply pressure bar 6�1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Continuous volume ANR dm3/s 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Electrical Power RequirementSpindle drive motor kVA 9 25 37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Axis motors X, Z kVA 3 3 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Turret Indexing motor kVA 1.5 1.5 1.5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Hydraulic pump motor kVA 3 3 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Coolant pump motor -- Low Pressure VA 650 650 650. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Coolant pump motor -- Low Pressure kVA 3.5 3.5 3.5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Control gear VA 750 750 750. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Machine Weight/Floor SpaceMachine net weight approx. kg 4000 4500 5000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Overall machine height (max) m 1.62 1.8 1.8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Machine width m 1.5 1.9 1.9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Machine length without swarf conveyor m 2.4 3.0 3.46Machine length with swarf conveyor m 3.2 3.9 4.3

All illustrations and specifications contained in this literature are based on the latest product information available at the time of publication.The right is reserved to make changes at any time without notice in prices, materials, equipment, specifications, and models and to discon-tinue models. In addition, all dimensions are nominal and can vary with machine model change.


Machine And Range Drawings

This section provides machine and range drawings for the Hawk range ofturning centers.

Fig. 23Front View

Th

eIn

form

atio

nsh

ow

nis

gen

eral

inn

atu

re.

Fo

rab

solu

tew

ork

ing

dim

ensi

on

sre

fer

toD

edic

ated

En

gin

eeri

ng

Dra

win

gs

sup

plie

dw

ith

the

mac

hin

e

A A

25

FLO

OR

LEV

EL

QU

ILL

TR

AV

EL

25

SW

AR

FC

ON

VE

YO

R

DIS

CH

AR

GE

HE

IGH

T

CN

CC

ON

TR

OL

STA

TIO

NZ

AX

IST

RA

VE

L

A B

E

C

D

O/L

LEN

GT

HW

ITH

OU

TC

ON

VE

YO

R

O/L

LEN

GT

HW

ITH

CO

NV

EY

OR

HA

WK

A B C D E

150

440

100

2.4

3.2

804

200

540

125

3.0

3.9

1075

250

690

125

3.45 4.3

1075


Fig. 24Left Side View

The Information shown is general in nature. Forabsolute working dimensions refer to DedicatedEngineering Drawings supplied with the machine

A

’X’ AXISTRAVEL

HEIGHT OFMACHINE

MACHINE WIDTHC

FLOOR

B

HAWKABC

1502151.61.5

2002451.81.9

2502701.81.9


218

R.T

OO

LIN

GE

NV

ELO

PE

.

210

MA

XTU

RN

ING

.

LON

GTO

OLH

OLD

ER

.

(OU

TSID

ES

PE

C.)

203

203

270

109.

5,LA

RG

ES

TC

OM

PO

NE

NT

SW

ING

BE

TWE

EN

BO

RIN

G-B

AR

SO

NA

D-

JAC

EN

TTU

RR

ET

PO

S’N

S.

323

DIS

TAN

CE

TOS

PIN

DLE

.

187

R.T

OO

LIN

GE

NV

ELO

PE

.

203

MA

X.T

UR

NIN

GTO

SP

EC

.

ALO

NG

TOO

LHO

LDE

RA

DJA

CE

NT

TOA

SH

OR

TTO

OLH

OLD

ER

(ON

EIT

HE

RS

IDE

)P

RE

SE

NTS

VIR

TUA

LLY

NO

INTE

RFE

RE

NC

E

EV

EN

WH

EN

FAC

ING

DO

WN

TOTH

EC

EN

TRE

-LIN

E.

MA

X.T

UR

NIN

G

BY

SP

EC

MA

X.T

UR

NE

DFA

CE

(OU

TSID

ES

PE

C.)

APA

RT

OFF

TOLH

OLD

ER

AD

JAC

EN

TTO

AS

HO

RT

TOO

LHO

LDE

R(O

NE

ITH

ER

SID

E)

PR

ES

EN

TSV

IRTU

AL-

LYN

OIN

TER

FER

EN

CE

EV

EN

WH

EN

FAC

ING

DO

WN

TO

CE

NTR

E.P

AR

TIN

GTO

OL

ISC

LOS

ER

TOD

ISC

THA

N

THE

TUR

NIN

GTO

OL.

.

BO

RIN

GB

AR

SO

FS

IMIL

AR

LEN

GTH

AR

EN

OT

RE

CO

MM

EN

DE

DTO

BE

PU

T

INTO

AD

JAC

EN

TD

ISC

PO

SIT

ION

S;

BU

TS

HO

ULD

FOLL

OW

THE

GE

NE

RA

L

RU

LEO

FB

EIN

GLO

AD

ED

INTO

THE

DIA

GO

NA

LLY

OP

PO

SE

DS

TATI

ON

S.

270

VD

I.30,

PC

D

30V

DI

340

DIS

C.

203

MA

XTU

RN

-IN

GB

YS

PE

C.

210

CH

UC

K

170

CH

UC

K

215

’X’A

XIS

TOTA

LW

OR

KIN

GS

TRO

KE

MA

XB

OR

ING

BA

R-Ø

32TU

RN

ING

TOO

L-20

X20

DIS

CV

DI.3

0.D

ISC

P.C

.D.-

270

DIS

CO

/DIA

-340

CH

UC

KS

TD-Ø

170

CH

UC

KS

PC

’L-Ø

210

202

R.P

AR

TIN

G-T

OO

LE

NV

ELO

PE

AP

PR

OX

.

27.4

50.8

(2”)

MA

X.B

AR

.DR

AW

TUB

EB

OR

E52

MM

203

THE

OR

ETI

CA

LM

AX

TOS

PE

C’N

126.

LAR

GE

ST

DIA

.BLA

NK

INC

HU

CK

WH

ICH

CA

NB

EPA

RTE

D;

WIT

HA

TUR

NIN

GTO

OLH

OLD

ER

INTH

EN

EX

TA

D-

JAC

EN

TP

OS

ITIO

N


Fig. 25Turning Capacity Chart -- Hawk 150 (VDI Tooling)


Fig. 26Turning Capacity Chart -- Hawk 200 Machines (VDI Tooling)


240

MA

XT

UR

NIN

G(L

ON

GT

OO

LHO

LDE

R)

OU

TS

IDE

SP

EC

254

MA

XT

UR

NIN

GB

YS

PE

CR

267.

7T

OO

LIN

GE

NV

ELO

PE

R23

4.5

TO

OLI

NG

EN

VE

LOP

E

ALO

NG

TO

OLH

OLD

ER

AD

JAC

EN

TT

OA

SH

OR

TT

OO

LHO

LDE

R(O

NE

ITH

ER

SID

E)

PR

ES

EN

TS

VIR

TU

ALL

YN

OIN

-T

ER

FE

RE

NC

EE

VE

NW

HE

NFA

CIN

GD

OW

NT

OT

HE

CE

NT

RE

LIN

E

R38

8D

ISTA

NC

ET

OS

PIN

DLE

CE

NT

RE

LIN

E

Ø34

0P.

C.D

.

Ø40

VD

I

Ø41

0D

ISK

Ø13

0.5

LAR

GE

ST

CO

MP

ON

EN

TS

WIN

GB

ET

WE

EN

BO

RIN

GB

AR

SO

NA

DJA

CE

NT

TU

RR

ET

PO

SIT

ION

S

BO

RIN

GB

AR

SO

FS

IMIL

AR

LEN

GT

HA

RE

NO

TR

EC

OM

ME

ND

ED

TO

BE

PU

TIN

TO

AD

JAC

EN

TD

ISK

PO

SIT

ION

S,

BU

TS

HO

ULD

FO

LLO

WT

HE

GE

NE

RA

LR

ULE

OF

BE

ING

LOA

DE

DIN

TO

TH

ED

IAG

ON

ALL

YO

PP

OS

ED

STA

TIO

NS

.

Ø20

0C

HU

CK

Ø25

4C

HU

CK

APA

RT

OF

FT

OO

LHO

LDE

RA

DJA

CE

NT

TO

AS

HO

RT

TO

OLH

OLD

ER

(ON

EIT

HE

RS

IDE

)PR

ES

EN

TS

VIR

TU

ALL

YN

OIN

TE

R-

FE

RE

NC

EE

VE

NW

HE

NFA

CIN

GD

OW

NT

OC

EN

TR

E.

PAR

TIN

GT

OO

LIS

CLO

SE

RT

OD

ISK

TH

AN

TH

ET

UR

NIN

GT

OO

L

R26

2.5

PAR

TIN

GT

OO

LE

NV

ELO

PE

AP

PR

OX

.

245

’X’A

XIS

TO

TAL

WO

RK

ING

ST

RO

KE

TU

RN

ING

CA

PAC

ITY

CH

AR

T

Ø16

6.5

LAR

GE

ST

DIA

BLA

NK

INC

HU

CK

WH

ICH

CA

NB

EPA

RT

ED

,WIT

HA

TU

RN

ING

TO

OL

HO

LDE

RIN

TH

EN

EX

TA

DJA

CE

NT

PO

CK

ET

Ø25

4T

HE

OR

ET

ICA

LM

AX

.T

OS

PE

CIF

ICAT

ION

Ø25

4M

AX

.TU

RN

ING

BY

SP

EC

.

Ø30

6.5

MA

X.T

UR

NE

DFA

CE

(OU

TS

IDE

SP

EC

)

Ø25

4M

AX

.TU

RN

ING

BY

SP

EC

.

Ø66

DR

AW

TU

BE

BO

RE


Fig. 27Turning Capacity Chart -- Hawk 250 Machines (VDI Tooling)


ALO

NG

TOO

LHO

LDE

RA

DJA

CE

NT

TOA

SH

OR

TTO

OLH

OLD

ER

(ON

EIT

HE

RS

IDE

)P

RE

SE

NTS

VIT

UA

LLY

NO

INTE

RFE

RE

NC

EE

VE

NW

HE

NPA

RTI

NG

DO

WN

TOTH

EC

EN

TRE

LIN

E.

Ø30

5M

AX

.TU

RN

IING

BY

SP

EC

.

Ø29

0.6

MA

XTU

RN

ING

(LO

NG

TOO

LHLD

ER

)OU

TSID

ES

PE

C

APA

RT

OFF

TOO

LHO

LDE

RA

DJA

CE

NT

TOA

SH

OR

TTO

OLH

OLD

ER

(ON

EIT

HE

RS

IDE

)PR

EE

NTS

VIR

TUA

LLY

NO

INTE

R-

FER

EN

CE

EV

EN

WH

EN

FAC

ING

DO

WN

TOC

EN

TRE

.PA

RTI

NG

TOO

LIS

CLO

SE

RTO

DIS

KTH

AN

THE

TUR

NIN

GTO

OL.

R29

7.7

TO

OLI

NG

EN

VE

LOP

ER

264.

7T

OO

LIN

GE

NV

ELO

PE

Ø30

5M

AX

.T

UR

NIIN

GB

YS

PE

C. Ø

162.

3LA

RG

ES

TC

OM

PO

NE

NT

SW

ING

BE

TW

EE

NB

OR

ING

BA

RS

ON

AD

-JA

CE

NT

TU

RR

ET

PO

SIT

ION

S

BO

RIN

GB

AR

SO

FS

IMIL

AR

LEN

GT

HA

RE

NO

TR

EC

OM

ME

ND

ED

TO

BE

PU

TIN

TO

AD

JAC

EN

TD

ISK

PO

SIT

ION

SB

UT

SH

OU

LDF

OLL

OW

TH

EG

EN

ER

AL

RU

LEO

FB

EIN

GLO

AD

ED

INT

OT

HE

DI-

AG

ON

ALL

YO

PP

OS

ED

STA

TIO

NS

.

Ø31

5C

HU

CK

.

Ø25

0C

HU

CK

.

270

’X’

AX

IST

OTA

LW

OR

KIN

GS

TR

OK

E.

Ø78

DR

AW

TU

BE

BO

RE

Ø19

6.5

LAR

GE

ST

DIA

BLA

NK

INC

HU

CK

WH

ICH

CA

NB

EPA

RT

ED

WIT

HA

TU

RN

ING

TO

OLH

OLD

ER

INT

HE

NE

XT

AD

JAC

EN

TP

OC

KE

T.

R29

2.5

PAR

TT

OO

LE

NV

ELO

PE

Ø35

6.61

MA

XT

UR

NE

DFA

CE

(OU

TS

IDE

SP

EC

)

Ø30

5M

AX

.T

UR

NIIN

GB

YS

PE

C.

TU

RN

ING

CA

PAC

ITY

CH

AR

T

Ø47

0D

ISK

Ø40

0P.

C.D

40V.

D.I


Fig. 28Data Sheets -- Hawk 150 (VDI Tooling)

The Information shown is general in nature. Forabsolute working dimensions refer to DedicatedEngineering Drawings supplied with the machine.

8

99

16

25

35

10

27.422

,RA

D.

135

30

75

22

22

8

105

KIT

AG

AWA

170-

-52

SM

W--1

69.

PC

LNL

2020

K12

.

TYP

’

320

SLI

DE

WID

TH43

5643

818

98

190

3252

6822

63

350

123

91

139

99

223

19

101.

6Q

UIL

LS

TRO

KE

173.

7O

/HA

NG

475.

8TA

ILS

TOC

KA

DJU

STM

EN

T

101.

6Q

UIL

LS

TRO

KE

173.

7

215

MA

XS

TRO

KE

8O

/TR

AVE

L

47

2525

27.4

10

35

454

AB

SO

LUTE

STR

OK

E

418

STR

OK

ETO

HA

RD

JAW

SO

NK

ITA

GA

WA

170

CH

UC

K40

2S

TRO

KE

TOH

AR

DJA

WS

ON

S.M

.W.1

70C

HU

CK

438

MA

XW

OR

KIN

GS

TRO

KE

DU

PLO

MAT

ICIN

DE

XE

RB

SA

150

TAIL

STO

CK

FULL

YB

AC

K

HEADSTOCKFRONTFACE

BULKHEADFRONTFACE

OV

ER

TRAV

EL


Fig. 29Stroke -- Hawk 200 Machines (VDI Tooling)


HEADSTOCKFRONTFACE

BULKHEADFRONTFACE

103

SM

ALL

KIT

AG

AW

A

4S

ER

RAT

ION

S

560

AB

SO

LUT

ES

TR

OK

E54

0M

AX

.WO

RK

ING

ST

RO

KE

540

TO

KIT

AG

AW

AB

B08

--66

CH

UC

KFA

CE

539

TO

SM

WB

HM

210

--A6

CH

UC

KFA

CE

SM

WH

AR

DJA

WS

1208

2121

127.

00Q

UIL

LS

TR

OK

E

TAIL

ST

OC

KF

ULL

YB

AC

K66

5.50

TAIL

ST

OC

KT

RAV

EL

10O

/TR

AVE

L

104

SM

ALL

SM

W

388

FR

OM

OF

DIS

KT

OO

FS

PIN

DLE

267.

7LO

NG

TO

OLH

OLD

ER

10O

/TR

AVE

L

245

MA

XS

TR

OK

E

1250

TOC

LEA

R’X

’TR

AVE

L

190

24

3

57

255.

6

358.

6

177.

91

65.1

190

100

90

4083


54

127.

00Q

UIL

LS

TRO

KE

Fig. 30Stroke -- Hawk 250 Machines (VDI Tooling)


297.

7LO

NG

TOO

LHO

LDE

R

70A

BS

OLU

TES

TRO

KE

690

MA

X.W

OR

KIN

GS

TRO

KE

690

TOK

ATA

GA

WA

B21

0--A

8C

HU

CK

FAC

E

HEADSTOCKFRONTFACE

TAIL

STO

CK

FULL

YB

AC

K

690

TOS

MW

BB

M25

0--A

8C

HU

CK

FAC

E

BULKHEADFRONTFACE

10 O/T

RAV

EL

119

SM

ALL

SM

W

190

100

Ø83

270

MA

X.S

TRO

KE

90

32

177.

91

64.6

Ø40

4S

ER

RAT

ION

S

113

SM

ALL

KIT

AG

AWA

SM

WH

AR

DJA

WS

1208

2621

897

TAIL

ST

OC

KT

RAV

EL

1530

.62

97.7

10O

/TR

AVE

L

27

234.

09

56

173

(347

.09)

179

56

443

FRO

MO

FD

ISK

TOO

FS

PIN

DLEC L

C L

190


10H6. 12H6. 16H6. 20H6. 25H6.

30H6.

30.

61

68.

75

61

75

22

63

H6.3252.68

7159

.68

.45

H625

MAX.-- IF USING FULL STROKE.190

17

4022

SQ.20

47

TYP’.35

3525

27.4,TYP’.

556582.4

ONE SET OF FIVE LINER BUSHES.

B1;30/20:212--100--150.RECTANGULAR TRANSVERSETOOLHOLDER,R.H.SHORT.

B3;30/20:212--105--150.RECTANGULAR TRANSVERSEINVERTED TOOLHOLDER,RIGHT--HAND;SHORT.

B7;30/20:222--105--150.RECTANGULAR TRANSVERSEINVERSE TOOLHOLDER,RIGHT--HAND:LONG.

E1;30/25:222--052--150TOOLHOLDER WITH:--INTERNAL COOLANT SUPPLY.

E1;30/32:222--055--150TOOLHOLDER WITH:--INTERNAL COOLANT SUPPLY.

E2;30/30:212--015--156BORING BAR HOLDER.

OPTIONAL STANDARD

TOOLING PACKAGE.

001270504000001.


Fig. 31Optional Standard Tooling Package -- Hawk 150 (VDI Tooling)


Fig. 32Optional Standard Tooling Package -- Hawk 200/250 Machines (VDI Tooling)


BO

RIN

GB

AR

HO

LDE

R--

VD

I40

Dia

40FO

RM

E1

27.4

032

DIN

6988

0

CO

LLE

TC

HU

CK

--V

DI4

0E

R32

TYP

EFO

RM

E4

30.4

032

DIN

6988

0

DR

ILL

HO

LDE

R--

VD

I40

Dia

32(W

ITH

INTE

RN

AL

CO

OLA

ND

SU

PP

LY)

FOR

ME

127

.403

2D

IN69

880

PAR

TIN

GO

FFB

LAD

EH

OLD

ER

--V

SI4

0--

RIG

HT

HA

ND

32.S

H32

32.4

032

TUR

NIN

GTO

OL

--V

DI4

0--

RIG

HT

HA

ND

LON

GFO

RM

B5

11.4

025/

20D

IN69

880

PAR

T3

TUR

NIN

GTO

OL

--V

DI4

0--

RIG

HT

HA

ND

SH

OR

TO

VE

RH

EA

DFO

RM

B3

6.40

25/2

0D

IN69

880

PAR

T3

TUR

NIN

GTO

OL

--V

DI4

0--

RIG

HT

HA

ND

SH

OR

TFO

RM

B1

5.40

25/2

0D

IN69

880

OP

TIO

NA

LS

TAN

DA

RD

TOO

LIN

GPA

CK

AG

E19

4617

7

ON

ES

ET

OF

FOU

RLI

NE

RB

US

HE

S

BO

RIN

GB

AR

SLE

EV

EØ

1228

.401

2

BO

RIN

GB

AR

SLE

EV

EØ

1628

.401

6

BO

RIN

GB

AR

SLE

EV

EØ

2028

.402

0

BO

RIN

GB

AR

SLE

EV

EØ

2528

.402

5

Ø12

H6

Ø16

H6

Ø20

H6

Ø25

H6

PLA

STI

CP

LUG

--V

DI4

0FO

RM

Z229

.40K

DIN

6988

0

76

90

Ø83

Ø40

Ø74

Ø52

Ø32

22 75

78

Ø40


152224

122124

Fig. 33Work Holding Options -- Hawk 150

91

123

3

50

108

22

91

ST

RO

KE

3.7

156

24

12

210

52.

67.5

8.513

12

99

139

,MIN

.45

.5

111

92

24

49,M

IN.

160

10.5

21

45

4

22 37

8223 23

210

24

67

21

45

10

20

52.

170.

170.

156.

9

24

138.

9

108.

9

130.

185.

138.

190.

165

22

148

60.

60.

46.5

,MIN

.

19

20 20

14

25 25

18

52.

20 20

13.7

5

48,M

IN.

52.

15

KIT

AG

AWA

170-

-52

BULKHEADFRONTFACE

HEADSTOCKFRONTFACE.

KIT

AG

AWA

B20

8,A

5.

PE

RJA

W.

68.7

,MA

X.

60,M

AX

.

SM

W--1

70--5

2

72,M

AX

.

OFJAWSERRATIONS.

SM

W.2

10,B

HD

.

SM

W.H

AR

DJA

W12

8203

0.C

M#:

--

C’B

OR

E

FO

RM

12.

SM

W.K

SZ,

MB

60.

CO

LLE

TC

HU

CK

.

KIT

AG

AWA

CR

L60.

CO

LLE

TC

HU

CK

.

SM

W.H

AR

DJA

W12

0816

21.C

M#:

--

C’B

OR

E

FO

RM

10.

63.5

,MA

X.

C’B

OR

E

FO

RM

10.

C’B

OR

E

FO

RM

10.

1270

4850

0000

1

1270

4860

0000

1

HA

RD

JAW

SH

B,0

6B1.

CM

#:--

1270

5720

0000

1

HA

RD

JAW

SH

B,0

8A1.

CM

#:--

1270

5750

0000

1

M12

M10

M10

M10

M10

M10

M12

The Information shown is general in nature. For absoluteworking dimensions refer to Dedicated Engineering Draw-ings supplied with the machine.

Ø21

0

139

99

2420

10 2145

67

46.5

MIN

63.5

MAX

52

49M

IN72

MAX

150

4

10.5

Ø52

45

98 111 15

6

2224

45.5

MIN

68.7

MAX

Ø20

123

91

67.5

12

Ø52

50

9110

8

148

Ø17

0

Ø17

0

Ø60

Ø13

8Ø

150

16513

8.9

108.

9

Ø60

Ø13

0Ø

185

156.

9

Ø52




HEADSTOCKFRONTFACE

HEADSTOCKFRONTFACE

HEADSTOCKFRONTFACE

BULKHEADFRONTFACE

BULKHEADFRONTFACE

BULKHEADFRONTFACE

BB

08--6

6B

210-

-A6

CR

S66

--A6

KIT

AG

AW

AC

HU

CK

ING

SY

ST

EM

Ø65

Ø15

0Ø

165

140

213

57

17

57

25

213

100

120

213

86

103

57

17

Ø20

0Ø

66Ø

7525

4




HEADSTOCKFRONTFACE

BULKHEADFRONTFACE

BB

M--2

10--A

6B

HM

--250

--A6

SM

WC

HU

CK

ING

SY

ST

EM

HEADSTOCKFRONTFACE

BULKHEADFRONTFACE

57

24

321

12410

5

Ø25

0Ø

75Ø

210

Ø66

57

17

321

10492



HEADSTOCKFRONTFACE

BULKHEADFRONTFACE

B21

0--A

8

HEADSTOCKFRONTFACE

BULKHEADFRONTFACE

HEADSTOCKFRONTFACE

BULKHEADFRONTFACE

B21

2--A

8

CD

C80

A2

(127

3393

)


KIT

AG

AW

AC

HU

CK

ING

SY

ST

EM

7720

159

11m

mS

TRO

KE

3020

0

❤❤ ❤❤

❤❤ ❤❤ 220

170

3

❤❤❤❤

❤❤❤❤

71

7718

7718

33

7171

100

110

113

122

304

9125

475


Fig. 37Work Holding Options -- Hawk 250 (Continued|


BB

M25

0--A

8B

HM

315-

-AB

HEADSTOCK--FRONTFACE

HEADSTOCK--FRONTFACE

BULKHEAD--FRONTFACE

BULKHEAD--FRONTFACE

7719

3077

77

371

105

371

119

111

136

9531

525

0

SM

WC

HU

CK

ING

SY

ST

EM


Fig. 38Bar Feed Options -- Hawk 150 machines


MULTIFEED 3 -- 76SHORT MAGAZINE BAR

FEED OPTION

91203090A

5500 MINCLEARANCE REQUIREDBEHIND MACHINE

450APPROX3210 APPROX1520 APPROX

350APPROX

3000 BAR CAPACITY

5180

4900 MINCLEARANCE REQUIREDBEHIND MACHINE

2700 720

4800 OVERALL LENGTH

3000 BAR CAPACITY

1150 REF

1770

1670

BAR FEED SHOWNROTATED THROUGH90° AND 135°

1064BASE

1150PLAN VIEW OF BASE

1975BASE


Motor Rating

The MTD (Machine Tool Duty) rating of the motor is based upon theamount of power delivered in a given amount of time. The following chartshows spindle motor MTD ratings.

Machine MTD Rating Continuous Use

Hawk Model 150 7.5 5.5

Hawk Model 200 15 11

Hawk Model 250 18.5 15

Fig. 39Hawk 150 -- Spindle Power Characteristics

MTDR

Continuous

7.5 kW

5.5 kW

PO

WE

R

5.0 kW

4.5 kW

30 750 3,500

SPEED RPM

5,500


MTDR

Continuous

15 kW

11 kW

PO

WE

R

30 750 4,500SPEED RPM



MTDR

Continuous

15 kW

11 kW

PO

WE

R

30 575 3,300SPEED RPM


MACHINE ALIGNMENT AND PROGRAM POINTS

On Turning Centers, the Z axis travels parallel to the spindle centerline andthe X axis travels perpendicular to the spindle centerline.

Several real and imaginary points are used to describe the relationshipbetween the machine elements, the tool point, and the workpiece. There aremany references to these points throughout the manual. This section definesthe machine setup and alignment points. Refer to Machine Range drawings.

MACHINE ZERO

CHUCK

SPINDLE

SPINDLEFACE

OD COMMONTOOL POINT

X*

Z*

X+

Z+

CENTERLINEAT GRID ALIGNPOSITION

Fig. 42Machine Alignment And Program Points

Machine Zero

Machine zero in the X axis is located on the spindle centerline.

Machine zero is established only once each time the machine is started andaligned. The control calculates all automatic range checking and interfer-ence parameters from machine zero.

NOTE: When coordinate reset is active and the machine is aligned, pro-gram zero is also located at this point.


Chapter 3Functional Description of Controls

Introduction -- GE FANUC 21i--TA CNC System

The GE Fanuc 21i--TA CNC system control consist of a Control mountedbehind flat screen with soft keys, MDI keypad, OperatorsControl Panel, andan MTB panel (Machine Tool Builders panel).

For full description on using the PCMIA slot and softkeys on the control/flatscreen unit and also the MDI keypad unit reference should be made to GEFanuc Operators manual (21i--TA B--63084EN) supplied with this machine.

The Hawk Turning centre is arranged with GE Fanuc 21i--TA ComputerNumerical Control System comprising an operator control station with a9.5” high resolution monochrome flatscreen display. See Fig. 43.

Fig. 43Control Station Layout for:-- Hawk Turning centres with fanuc 21i TA

Control/Flat Screen/Softkeys MDI Keypad

PC MIASlot(SRAM)Card

RS 232 Serial Data Port

OperatorsControlMTB Panel

F

3--

X

x

1

0

0

+--

+X

--Z +Z

--X-- +


Fig. 44Operators Control Panel

A

U

X

1--

X

+

X+--

x

1X

Z+X

--Z +Z

--X

X1 X10 X100

AUX1

-- +RS 232

A

B

C

D

E

F

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

100%

OPERATOR PANEL -- PUSHBUTTON DESCRIPTIONS

REF DESCRIPTION REF DESCRIPTION

A1 Memory Operation C5 Turret Jog -- (decrement)A2 EDIT mode C6 AUX 1 -- spare membrane keyA3 MDI Operation C8 --Z axis JOG/MPG axis selectionA4 Align Machine C9 Rapid traverseA5 Jog mode C10 +Z axis JOG/MPG axis selectionA6 Parts catcher down D1 Program restartA7 Parts catcher up D2 Tool Setting Arm Down (active)A8 Chuck -- ID Grip D3 Tool Setting Arm Up (stowed)A9 Chuck -- OD Grip D4 Spindle speed decrementA10 Offset measure D5 Spindle 100%B1 Single block D6 Spindle speed incrementB2 Block delete D8

B3 Optional stop D9 --X axis JOG/MPG axis selectionB4 MPG mode x 1 D10

B5 MPG mode x 10 F1 Cycle startB6 MPG mode x 100 F2 Cycle stopB8 F3 Program stopB9 +X axis JOG/MPG axis selection F4 Spindle clockwise (CW)B10 F5 Spindle stopC1 Dry run F6 Spindle counterclockwise (CCW)C2 Program test F8 Coolant OnC3 Axes inhibit F9 Coolant OffC4 Turret Jog + (increment) F10 Coolant Auto


AUTOMATIC OPERATION -- PROGRAMME SOURCE

MEMORY OPERATION -- (Push button with LED) (A1)

This mode is selected to run a part programme registered in the activeprogramme memory. (See GE Fanuc Operators Manual -- III Operationchapters 1.2 and 4.1).

EDIT MODE -- (Push button with LED) (A2)

This mode is selected to edit part programmes registered in the activeprogramme memory. (See GE Fanuc Operators Manual -- III Operationchapters 9).

MDI OPERATION -- (Push button with LED) (A3)

This mode selection enables a programme of up to 10 blocks to be createdand processed from the MDI buffer memory. (See GE Fanuc OperatorsManual -- III Operation chapters 1.2 and 4.2).

EXECUTION PUSHBUTTONS

CYCLE START (Push button with LED) (F1)

This push button causes the active NC programme to start, providing thatthe following conditions are met:--

1) All axes have been aligned.

2) The turret is aligned, i.e. ALIGN MACHINE key isilluminated

3) No NC or Machine faults are active

4) AUTO or MDI mode has been selected

5) Operator door/s is/are closed

CYCLE STOP (Push button with LED) (F2)

Cycle stop is used to stop all feed motors and to suspend the NC cycle.

The LED in this button is illuminated whenever the CYCLE STOP is active.It is cancelled when restarting the NC cycle using the CYCLE START pushbutton.

NOTE: Any active programme dwell will also be stopped by using thispush button. If CYCLE STOP is depressed during a TappingCycle the NC cycle will continue until the spindle has reversedand the axis retracted.


PROGRAMME STOP (Push button with LED) (F3)

Pressing this push button during NC part programmed execution causes theactive cycle to be held at the end of the current programme block. To restartthe active part programme, the CYCLE START push button must bedepressed.

It is permitted to stop the spindle whilst in a programme stop condition. TheNC cycle however cannot be resumed until the spindle has been restarted.

PROGRAMME STOP push button is active in both AUTO & MDI modesbut only whilst the machine is in cycle.

The LED in this push button is illuminated when programme stop is activeand remains illuminated until the cycle is restarted or the control system isreset.

SPINDLE CONTROL BUTTONS

SPINDLE STOP (Push button with LED) (F5)

This push button causes an immediate spindle stop and is active at all times.

If the machine is in cycle, a cycle stop is also generated.

The LED in this button is illuminated if the spindle is stopped during anAuto Cycle interrupt condition and acts as a reminder that the spindle mustbe restarted before the cycle can be resumed.

SPINDLE CLOCKWISE (CW) (Push Button with LED) (F4)

This push button can be used to restart the spindle, once it has been stoppedduring an Auto Cycle Interrupt.

In C--Axis Mode OFF (M50 active), this button can also be used to jog thespindle in the clockwise direction providing the control is not in cycle or ina cycle interrupt condition, and only when the operator door is closed. SeeCAUTION.

In C--Axis Mode ON (M51 active), this button, in conjunction with thecontrol set in JOG mode, can be used to jog the spindle in the clockwisedirection. The operator door is latched shut at all times when M51 is theactive M--code. See CAUTION. Also, see HANDWHEEL (MPG) foralternative spindle jog facility.

SPINDLE COUNTER CLOCKWISE (CCW) (Push button withLED) (F6)

This push button can be used to restart the spindle, once it has been stoppedduring an Auto Cycle interrupt.

In C--Axis Mode OFF (M50 active), this button can also be used to jog thespindle in the CCW direction providing the control is not in cycle or in acycle interrupt condition, and only when the operator door is closed. SeeCAUTION.

In C--Axis Mode ON (M51 active), this button, in conjunction with thecontrol set in JOG mode, can be used to jog the spindle in the CCWdirection. The operator door is latched shut at all times when M51 is the


active M--code. See CAUTION. Also, see HANDWHEEL (MPG) foralternative spindle jog facility.

CAUTION

Spindle Jog

The Spindle/Chuck must be in an interference free positionbefore pressing the SPINDLE CW/CCW pushbutton.

Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage tothe machine, workpiece and tooling.

SPINDLE 100% (Push button with LED) (D5)

This push button is used to return the actual spindle speed to 100% of thelast programmed value and to remove any active spindle speed overrideimposed by means of the spindle speed increment and decrement buttons.

The LED in this push button is illuminated all the time that the 100% spindlespeed override is active

SPINDLE SPEED INCREMENT (Push button with LED) (D6)

This push button is used to override the programmed spindle speed. Theactual spindle speed is increase by 10% each time this button is depressed,up to a maximum of 120% of the programmed value or the the maximumspindle speed if this occurs sooner.

The LED in this push button is illuminated once the 120% override is active.

NOTE: Spindle override is ignored whilst M48 is active

SPINDLE SPEED DECREMENT (Push button with LED) (D4)

This push button is used to override the programmed spindle speed. Theactual spindle speed is decreased by 10% each time this button is depressed,down to a minimum of 50% of the programmed value or the the minimumspindle speed if this occurs sooner.

The LED in this push button is illuminated once the 50% override is active.

NOTE: Spindle override is ignored whilst M48 is active

OPERATION BUTTONS

ALIGN MACHINE -- (Push Button with LED) (A4)

This pushbutton is used for referencing the machine axes and turret to thecontrol system. (See chapter 4 of this manual for machine and mechanismalignment procedure).

MPG MODE (HANDWHEEL) & INCREMENT SELECTIONPUSHBUTTONS

MPG MODE -- 0.001mm (Push Button with LED) (B4)

This pushbutton selects MPG Mode with 0.001mm distance move perincrement of the handwheel.

100%

+

--

X1






JOG MODE -- (Push Button with LED) (A5)

This button accesses the ’axis and direction’ push button selections toprovide ’continuous move’ axis jogs. (See push button references B9, D9,C8 and C10 in this manual, and GE Fanuc Operators Manual -- III Operationchapter 3.2).

In C--Axis Mode ON (M51 active), manual rotation of the spindle/chuckusing the Handwheel (MPG) control is possible proivided JOG mode isselected ON.

OPERATION SELECT -- PUSHBUTTONS

SINGLE BLOCK -- (Push Button with LED) (B1)

This push button allows an active part programme to be processed one blockat a time. When this feature is active each block must be started using theCYCLE START push button. The single block push button is enabled inAUTO & MDI mode. The LED is illuminated when SINGLE BLOCK isactive.

NOTE: It is permitted to use this push button to interrupt an active cycle.For affect of single block on canned cycles refer to GE Fanucoper-ators manual.

BLOCK DELETE -- (Push Button with LED) (B2)

When BLOCK DELETE is active all programme blocks preceded by theBLOCK DELETE character (/) are skipped during an NC cycle This pushbutton is enabled only in AUTO & MDI mode.

The LED is illuminated when BLOCK DELETE is active.

OPTIONAL STOP -- (Push Button with LED) (B3)

This push button enables the OPTIONAL PROGRAMME STOP feature.When optional stop is active the NC cycle will stop on reading an M01 codeand can only be restarted by pressing the CYCLE START push button, allexisting modal programme information is unaffected by this function. Thispush button is enabled in AUTO & MDI mode only.

The LED is illuminated when OPTIONAL STOP is activate.

DRY RUN -- (Push Button with LED) (C1)

When the DRY RUN feature is active, coolant flow is inhibited and thefeedrate specified by the NC programme is ignored.

The OVERRIDE SELECTOR switch is used to modify the DRY RUNfeedrate from 0.1M/min. to 10 M/min.

X10

X100


Rapid motions are conducted as normal and can also be overridden by theOVERRIDE SELECTOR.

This push button is enabled in AUTO & MDI mode.

The LED is illuminated when DRY RUN is active.

Dry run can only be selected when the machine is not in cycle.

To start the cycle in dry run requires a double press of the CYCLE STARTpush button. On the first press an operator prompt message DRY RUNACTIVE REPRESS CYCLE START appears on the CRT as a warning thatDRY RUN is active.

PROGRAMME TEST -- (Push Button with LED) (C2)

When the programme test feature is active, all T and S codes and all of theM codes with the exception of:M00, M01, M02, M30, M98 and M99 arenot processed.

This push button is enabled in AUTO & MDI mode. TheLED is illuminatedwhen programme test is active.

PROGRAM TEST is used during programme checking and may also beused in conjunction with AXES INHIBIT.

AXES INHIBIT -- (Push Button with LED) (C3)

Axes inhibit suppresses all axis moves. The CRT display however isupdated as if the axis were not inhibited.

This push button is only enabled in AUTO & MDI mode whilst not in cycle.The LED is illuminated when AXIS INHIBIT is active.

Axes inhibit is used during programme checking and may also be used inconjunction with PROGRAM TEST.

AXIS/DIRECTION SELECTION PUSHBUTTONS

X+ AXIS (Push Button with LED) (B9)

This push button is used for continuous axis jogging in the X+ direction. Itis also used in the MPG mode for HANDWHEEL X axis selection whereupon both X+ and X-- push buttons are illuminated.

X-- AXIS (Push Button with LED) (D9)

This push button is used for continuous axis jogging in the X-- direction. Itis also used in the MPG mode for HANDWHEEL X axis selection whereupon both X+ and X-- push buttons are illuminated.

Z+ AXIS (Push Button with LED) (C10)

This push button is used for continuous axis jogging in the Z+ direction. Itis also used in the MPG mode for HANDWHEEL Z axis selection whereupon both Z+ and Z-- push buttons are illuminated.

Z-- AXIS (Push Button with LED) (C8)

This push button is used for continuous axis jogging in the Z-- direction. Itis also used in the MPG mode for HANDWHEEL z axis selection whereupon both Z+ and Z-- push buttons are illuminated.

X Z

+X*

--X

+Z*

--Z


NOTE: X+, and Z+ pushbuttons also illuminate; in Auto or MDI modewhen the corresponding machine axes are sent to their alignmentposition using G28 and during the machine axes alignment se-quence.

RAPID TRAVERSE (Push Button with LED) (C9)

This push button can be operated simultaneously with any power feed pushbutton to produce rapid axis jogging motion as long as the operator door isclosed.

PARTS CATCHER DOWN (Push Button with LED) (A6)

(only active when the parts catcher option is fitted)

This push button is used to jog the parts catcher down.It is only active when not in cycle and with the operator door closed.

PARTS CATCHER UP (Push Button with LED) (A7)

(only active when the parts catcher option is fitted)

This push button is used to jog the parts catcher up.It is only active when not in cycle and with the operator door closed.

TURRET JOG + (INCREMENT) (Push Button with LED) (C4)

This push button is used to jog the turret in the clockwise (CW)incrementing count direction. (CW as viewed from spindle to turret).

It is only active when not in cycle, operator door closed, spindle is stationaryand the AUX 1 push button is pressed.

TURRET JOG -- (DECREMENT) (Push Button with LED) (C5)

This push button is used to jog the turret in the counter clockwise (CCW)decrementing count direction. (CCW as viewed from spindle to turret).

It is only active when not in cycle, operator door closed, spindle is stationaryand the AUX 1 push button is pressed.

CHUCK -- ID GRIP (Push Button with LED) (A8)

This push button is used to select ID gripping of the chuck.

It is only active when not in cycle and the spindle is stationary.

CHUCK -- OD GRIP (Push Button with LED) (A9)

This push button is used to select OD gripping of the chuck.


OFFSET MEASURE (Push Button with LED) (A10)

This push button is used to set offsets on the machine.Refer to Fanuc manual for a full description of its use.


*


TOOL SETTING ARM DOWN (Push Button with LED) (D2)

This push button is used to jog the Renishaw Tool Setting Arm (TSA) to itsdown position -- Active position.

It is only active when not in cycle, operator door closed and the spindle isstationary.

TOOL SETTING ARM UP (Push Button with LED) (D3)

This push button is used to jog the Renishaw Tool Setting Arm (TSA) to itsup position -- Stowed position.


PROGRAM RESTART (Push Button with LED) (D1)

This push button is currently not used.

AUX 1 -- Auxillary Push Button (Push Button with LED) (C6)

Used in conjunction with the Turret Jog + and Turret Jog -- push buttons.

COOLANT BUTTONS

COOLANT OFF (Push Button with LED) (F9)

This push button is used to manually turn the coolant flow off.

It is functional in all modes.

When selected during AUTO or MDI mode, M08 coolant on, is ignored.

COOLANT ON (Push Button with LED) (F8)

This push button is used to manually start the coolant flow and is active inall modes, provided that the operator access door is closed.

When selected during AUTO or MDI modes M09 coolant off is ignored.

NOTE: Even if COOLANT ON is selected, the coolant flow is inhib-ited during an automatic turret index but will restart oncompletion of the turret index.

COOLANT AUTO (Push Button with LED) (F10)

This push button enables the coolant system to be controlled via coolant Mcodes.

It is only selectable in AUTO or MDI modes.

NOTE: The COOLANT ON and COOLANT OFF push buttons can beused during auto cycle, if COOLANT AUTO is to be overridden.

COOLANT AUTO is the default status when first selecting the AUTO orMDI modes and assumed at the end of every programme.

AUX1


The coolant flow is automatically turned off by: M00, M01, M02, M06,M09 and M30 codes, providing AUTO COOLANT is selected.

MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS

MEMORY PROTECTION -- Keyswitch

This keyswitch is used to prevent part programs, offset values, parametersand setting data from being registered, modified or deleted accidentally.

This switch is enabled in all operating modes. The named functions areLOCKED OFF when the MEMORY PROTECTION KEYSWITCH is inthe ON position.

RS 232 SERIAL DATA PORT

The port can be used to interface any RS 232 serial data input / output devicevia the machine mounted 25 pin D--type female socket. See chapter 10 ofthis manual for set--up and operational description of this facility.

FEED/RAPID/JOG OVERRIDE -- Selector Switch

This selector switch is used to override:

1. Programmed Feedrate (Outer Scale 0--150%) in AUTO & MDImode.If an override could result in a feedrate greater than the maximumprogrammable feedrate, then the feedrate is clamped to thatmaximum value.

2. Rapid Traverse (Inner Scale 0--100%) in AUTO/MDI/JOG modes.

3. Jog rate (Inner Scale 0--100%) in JOG mode only.

Selecting the 0% graduation causes a feedhold condition except during atapping cycle.

NOTE: Feed override is not possible whilst M46, G63 or Tapping cyclesare active.

EMERGENCY STOP (red mushroom pushbutton with latch)

Pressing this pushbutton causes an immediate slide and spindle stop,followed by the removal of drive power. The pushbutton remains depressed(latched) when actuated. Twisting the pushbutton in a counterclockwisedirection releases the Emergency Stop button.

The pushbutton is active at all times. See CAUTION.CAUTION

Actuating this button with themachine in a cutting cyclemay damage cutting toolsand work pieces.


1500

10050


MTB OPERATORS CONTROL PANEL

Fig. 45MTB Operators Control Panel

Chuck P.B.Unclamp

Tailstock Advance/Step Advance

SpindleLoadmeter

TailstockRetract

0

50

FANUC

Cycle Start(duplicated)

Chuck P.B.Clamp

MasterStart

0 25 50 75 100 150 180

% SPINDLE LOAD

Spindle Load Meter

Fig. 46Spindle Load Meter

0 25 50 75 100 150 180

% SPINDLE LOAD

Yellow Band 100 --150% Red Band 150 --180%

The load meter is graduated in percentage load of the maximum output ofthe spindle motor.

0 to 100% Range (Continuous rating)

Providing the spindle load remains at 100% or less the machine spindle canbe run continuously.


110 to 150% Range -- Yellow Band (30 minutes 50% rating)

For every minute or part of a minute up to a maximum of 30 minutes, thatthe spindle load is in the 101 to 150% to range, there must either be anequivalent time period immediately following this overload when thespindle is in a NO LOAD condition, or a proportionally longer period oftime when the load remains within the continuous operating range.

151 to 180% Range -- Red Band (1 minute overload capacity)

For any period of time up to a maximum of 1 minute the spindle load canenter the 151 -- 180% overload range. Immediately after this period howeverthe spindle must, for an equal period of time, be in a NO LOAD condition,or for a proportionally longer period of time, must stay within thecontinuous operating range.

NOTE: The above conditions are theoretical definitions and should onlybe used as a guide.

In practice the spindle load is continuously varying and can therefore bedifficult to estimate. As a general rule the spindle load should be kept asmuch as possible within the CONTINUOUS operating range with onlyoccasional loadings being used within the 101 to 150% YELLOW BANDrange.

CAUTION: The machine cycle should not take the spindle load intothe 151 -- 180% RED BAND range whilst cutting is beingcarried out.Only during acceleration of the spindle should the loadmeter go to the full scale deflection (RED BAND).

MASTER START -- Illuminated push button

This push button is used to power up the control and axis/spindle drives ina controlled sequence.

Depressing the master start push button will bring the CNC control poweron in a control EMG condition.

Repressing MASTER START -- on receipt of successful control power on,will apply power to the spindle and axis drives, where upon the controlremoves the EMG status indicator.

The control will report an EMG ALM condition, if the Emergency Stoppush button is depressed or if axes go into a hard OVERTRAVEL, or if anyother alarm is active which results in the removal of servo control.

The MASTER START push button is also used in the event of a hardwareaxis overtravel, as it overrides the overtravel limit switches, whilst helddepressed. The axis drive power is thus reinstated, enabling the axis to bejogged back, to within its normal operating range.

CYCLE START

This duplicated push button has the identical function to that of the CYCLESTART push button (F1) on the operators control panel.

See Page 3--4.


HANDWHEEL (MPG)

When MPG mode is selected, clockwise rotation of the handwheel willresult in Positive axis motion and counterclockwise rotation will giveNegative axis motion.

Axis selection is performed by using the relevant control panel pushbuttons.

MPG mode and the distance per increment are selectable from the controlpanel push buttons.

Increments are:0.001mm-- MPG x 1 pushbutton0.010mm-- MPG x 10 pushbutton0.100mm-- MPG x 100 pushbutton

Handwheel control of the machine axes (as described above) is possiblewhen C--Axis Mode OFF (M50) is active. In this mode, the operator doormay be open or closed whilst an axis is in motion.

In C--Axis Mode ON (M51 active), the handwheel may be used to controlrotation of the spindle/chuck. Handwheel mode is selected by pressing oneof the ’MPG Mode -- Distance/Increment’ push buttons on the operatorpanel. The Spindle CW or Spindle CCW push button must be pressed toengage the spindle/chuck; both CW and CCW button LED’s illuminate.Clockwise rotation of the Handwheel produces a clockwise rotation of thespindle/chuck as viewed from the +Z (tailstock) end of the machine.

CHUCK UNCLAMP push button

This push button unclamps the chuck.It is only active when not in cycle and with the operator door open.See NOTE 1 below.

CHUCK CLAMP push button

This push button clamps the chuck.It is only active when not in cycle and with the operator door open.See NOTE 1 below.

NOTE 1: The clamping/unclamping of the workpiece is determinedby the selection of ID/OD Grip.

WARNING

Chuck Operation

Do not operate the chuck at speeds (rpm) greater than itsmaximum rated speed or at pressures greater than its max-imum rated pressure. Refer to machine mounted plate orchuck manufacturer. Reduce chuck speed (rpm) when us-ing special top jaw tooling. Top jaws must not extend be-yond the chuck diameter. Never place your hands or anypart of your body near the chuck when jogging the spindle,adjusting thrust or pressure. Lubricate the chuck accord-ing to the manufacturer’s specifications. Use jaw serra-tions as noted on machine mounted plate or specified bychuck manufacturer. Failure to follow this instruction mayresult in serious personal injury.

0

50

FANUC


TAILSTOCK QUILL ADVANCE/STEP ADVANCE push button

This push button is used to advance the tailstock quill.It has two modes of operation:--

a) Operator door open -- Step advance -- Quill stops advancing whenpushbutton is released. Quill is not held fully forward, i.e. Operatordoor must be closed and pushbutton pressed to “lock” the tailstockfully forward.

b) Operator door closed -- full advance -- Quill is held fully forward.See WARNING.

TAILSTOCK QUILL RETRACT push button

This push button is used to retract the tailstock quill.Operator door must be open for the tailstock to retract.

WARNING

Tailstock Quill Step

Tailstock Quill Step Advance must only be used for set--uppurposes as pressure is not maintained in its static posi-tion. Failure to follow this instruction may result in seriouspersonal injury.


Machine Pressure -- Tailstock Thrust -- Chuck DrawbarForce -- Chuck Brake (Dampener) Control

This control panel is located on the front of the machine to the left of theheadstock and includes: main machine pressure gauge, tailstock thrustgauge and pressure control knob, chuck drawbar force gauge and pressurecontrol knob. A further pressure gauge and control knob is also supplied toadjust a chuck brake (dampener) when the C--Axis mode feature is present.

Machine Pressure -- The machine system operating pressure of 35 Baris indicated on the uppermost gauge. This pressure is set by a regulatingscrew mounted on the top of the hydraulic system pump.

Tailstock Thrust -- The centrally located tailstock thrust gauge monitorssettings of the adjacent pressure regulating valve control knob. Themaximum thrust is 7.86kN @ 35 Bar.

When setting the tailstock quill pressure, advance the quill until the tailstockcenter is engaged with the part, then adjust the valve until the desiredpressure setting is obtained.

When setting a lower pressure, adjust the valve until the lower setting isobtained. Retract the quill then advance it again to check for the correctlower setting. If the pressure falls below 3 Bar before starting a cycle orduring a cycle, the machine will stop and display the appropriate alert.

Chuck Drawbar Force -- The lower chuck drawbar force gauge monitorssettings of the adjacent pressure regulating valve control knob. Chuck jawgrip force must be checked a every 200 hours (minimum) of operation.

The main spindle chuck pressure regulating valve controls the grippingforce of the main spindle power chuck. Use the maximum pressure settingunless the maximum pressure setting distorts the part.

The maximum force is 56.5kN @ 35Bar. Do not exceed the maximumpressure stamped on this plate. If higher pressure is selected, high stressforces are created within the chuck resulting in possible damage to thechuck. Check the chuck manufacturer’s sprcifications for maximumchucking pressures, maximum rpm and lubrication before using thiscontrol.

Check the clamping force with a Static Grip Clamping Force Gauge (forceper jaw with spindle not running) and a Dynamic Grip Clamping ForceGauge (force per jaw measured with the spindle running).

NOTE: Use the maximum manufacturer approved chuck clampimg forcepressure that will result in minimum part distortion.

Chuck Brake (Dampener): C--Axis Interpolation Mode -- Thepurpose of this brake is to offer a degree of dampening to the cutting actionwhen the spindle chuck is in C--Axis interpolation mode and miscellaneouscode M53 is programmed. The minimum setting for the brake is 2 Bar.

The amount of dampening is adjustable by the user and will depend on theseverity of the cutting process. Brake adjustment is via a regulating screwalong side the pressure gauge.

Fig. 47Main Spindle Chuck & Tailstock Pressure

Machine Pressure Gauge

Tailstock Pressure Gauge

TailstockPressureKnob

ChuckPressureKnob

Chuck Pressure Gauge

CHUCK BRAKE PRESSURE GAUGE

Fig. 48Chuck Brake Pressure (Option)


MAIN POWER DISCONNECT SWITCH

See WARNING

This switch is used to supply power to the machines main electrical cabinetand is located on the rear door of the electrical cabinet.

When the switch is in the ON position: power is supplied to the machineelectrical cabinet.

Before servicing the machine or control, always place this switch in the offposition. Lock and tag this switch with a “do not start sign”.

It is also important to wait for the condensers in the servo drives to becompletely discharged. A red LED is fitted to each servo drive power circuitPCB. The LED will remain illuminated whilst any charge remains in thecondensers.

0

lor

WARNING

Place the MAIN POWERDISCONNECT switch inthe OFF position, lock itand tag it with a “DO NOTSTART”sign before ser-vicing the machine orcontrol.

Note: This switch doesnot isolate the incomingsupply to the electricalcabinet or the supply tothe Transformer Unit.

Failure to follow this in-struction can result in ma-chine damage and per-sonal injury.


Optional Operating Devices

Swarf Conveyor

The swarf conveyor unit is positioned across the front of the machine withthe outlet hood on the right side of the machine.

Fig. 49Swarf Conveyor Control Panel

1. Conveyor Control AUTO/ ON MAN/OFF -- Selector Switch

In AUTO selection, the chip conveyor will rotate continuously in itsnormal clockwise direction when the operator door is closed and themachine is set in--cycle by pressing the CYCLE START push button.

NOTE: The conveyor will stop if,

6) The EMERGENCY STOP push button is pressed.

7) The Operator Door is opened.

8) The MAN/AUTO selector switch is set to MANUAL.

In MAN (manual) selection, the swarf conveyor will remain stationaryunless the conveyor direction selector switch is set to Forward orReverse.


2. CONVEYOR DIRECTION --Selector Switch (spring centered)

This switch is a jog facility operative only when the conveyorMAN/AUTO selector switch is set to MANUAL.

With the conveyor direction switch held in the FWD (forward)position, the conveyor will rotate in its normal clockwise direction;when held in the REV (reverse) position the conveyor will rotate in acounter--clockwise direction. When released, the switch will springback to the OFF (center) position.

3. EMERGENCY STOP -- Push Button (Red Mushroom)

This push button is pressed to immediately stop machine cycle andoperation in the event of an emergency.

When this push button is pressed machine power drops, stopping thefeed of all axes and spindle. Control power will remain on and amessage is displayed on the control CRT, “MACHINE OFF E--STOP.”

The EMERGENCY STOP must be released before the machine can berestarted. To release the button it must be twisted counter--clockwise.

If EMERGENCY STOP is pressed while the axes are not in motion anautomatic realignment is possible when the button is released.

Wash Gun

The Wash Gun (if supplied) is used by the operator to flush swarf into themachine swarf collection tray, or swarf conveyor system (if supplied). Thewash gun facility may be used when,

-- The machine is not in--cycle.-- The operator door is open.-- The Coolant ON push button is pressed ON.

The wash gun is active for a period of 30 seconds after which the CoolantON push button must be pressed to restore the coolant supply to the washgun.


GENERAL CHUCK SAFETY GUIDELINES

Observe these guidelines in the daily operation of the turning center. SeeCAUTION.

1. Always lubricate the chuck according to the instructions given in thismanual or the chuck manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Clamp all work fixtures securely before starting the machine. Whenusing work fixtures mounted in the chuck, use the chuck jaws to centerthe fixture only. Clamp the fixture to the chuck face using the tappedholes and T--slots in the chuck face once the chuck jaws are securedabout the fixture. If appropriate, remove the chuck and mount thefixture directly to the spindle.

NOTE: Do NOT place a chuck within a chuck already mounted to thespindle.

3. Inspect the top jaws before starting any operation. In the event of awreck, always replace the top jaw hold down bolts.

4. Always replace the T--nuts, which clamp the top jaws to the masterjaws, at the first sign of wear.

5. Never use top jaws with worn or broken jaw serrations. On the firstoperation, always ensure that the jaw serrations penetrate the part.

6. Load the part in the chuck with one jaw in the 6 o’clock position.

7. Never place your hands or any portion of the body, near the chuck whenjogging the spindle. See WARNING.

CAUTION

Always observe the generalchuck safety guidelines inthe daily operation of themachine. Failure to followthis instruction may result indamage to the machine.

WARNING

Never place your hands orany part of the body nearthe chuck when joggingthe spindle. Failure to fol-low this instruction mayresult in serious personalinjury.


CHUCKS

Since a variety of chucks may be mounted on the machine, the followinginformation describes the general types of chucking systems that can beapplied to the machine, top tooling recommendations, a general discussionof chuck jaw pressure, lubrication of chuck systems and some general chucksafety guidelines.

CHUCKING SYSTEM TYPES

These four types of chucks are recommended for use on these machines.

Self--centering -- simultaneously moves all chuck jaws equally to center theworkpiece in the chuck.

Self--compensating -- used where there is a need to locate the workpiecefrom center holes, or other locating devices.

Combination -- combine both self--centering and self--compensating fea-tures in one chuck.

Collet type -- ideal for bar stock, they are compatible with square, hexagonal,and round shapes.

CHUCK

CENTRIFUGAL FORCE AND SPEED LIMITATIONS

Centrifugal force increases as the rpm increases and tends to throw thechuckjaws outward. This decreases the part gripping force.

Centrifugal force increases as the jaws are moved farther from the centerlineof the chuck, or are made heavier.

Exceeding a chuck’s rated speed results in high internal stresses and loss ofclamping force. This can cause jaw and/or chuck component breakageresulting in the release of the jaw and part. See CAUTION 1.

Top jaws should never extend beyond the diameter of the chuck.

Always reduce the spindle speed when using special top jaw tooling config-urations. See CAUTION 2.

CHUCK LUBRICATION

All chucking systems require some type of lubrication. Chucks may be self--lubricating, or require manual lubrication. If manual lubrication is required,follow the instructions in this section for standard chucks installed by thefactory. For other chucks, follow the chuck manufacturer’s specificationsfor frequency and lubrication type.

Inadequate lubrication or use of the wrong type of lubricant will greatlyreduce the chuck jaws grip force and allow the workpiece to slip or bethrown from the chuck.

If in doubt about the lubrication requirements for the chuck, contact yourlocal Cincinnati Machine Field Service Representative. See CAUTION 3.

Factory installed standard chucks that require manual lubrication should belubricated once during every eight hours of operation.

WARNINGChuck Operation:

Do not operate the chuckat speeds (rpm) greaterthan its maximum ratedspeed or at pressuresgreater than its maximumrated pressure. Reducechuck speed (rpm) whenusing special top jaw tool-ing. Top jaws must notextend beyond the chuckdiameter. Never placeyour hands or any part ofyour body near the chuckwhen jogging the spindle,adjusting thrust or pres-sure. Lubricate the chuckaccording to themanufacturer’s specifica-tions.


CAUTION 1

Do not operate the spindle atspeeds greater than themaximum rated speed forthe chuck. Failure to followthis instruction may result indamage to the chuck andmachine.

CAUTION 2

Always reduce spindlespeed when using specialtop jaw tooling. Failure to fol-low this instruction mayresult in damage to themachine.

CAUTION 3

Always lubricate the chuck inaccordance with theseinstructions or follow thechuck manufacturer’s speci-fications. Failure to followthis instruction may result indamage to the chuck andmachine.


TOP JAW RECOMMENDATIONS

The following illustrations list general guidelines for designing and settingchuck top jaws.

CORRECT INCORRECT

CORRECT INCORRECT

CORRECT INCORRECT

CORRECT INCORRECT INCORRECT

11

1

1

1

1. The length of the top jaws shouldnot exceed the height, and theheight of the top jaw should notexceed the length of the masterjaw. Do not exceed a 1:1 ratio.

2. The gripping diameter should beequal to, or greater than, thediameter to be machined. Whenthis is not possible, reduce thefeed rate and the depth of cut.

3. Grip the workpiece as close to theface of the chuck as possible.

4. Use special jaws with a longer gripon large, long, or heavier workpiece.

5. Jaws should be designed so thediameter fully contracts the work--piece. Standard stepping top jawsseldom achieve this goal.


PIN (IN JAW BOLT HOLE)

RING

SLUG

6. Use pin type jaws to penetrateforging, casting and irregularsurfaces.

7. Use sharp 3.2 mm (.125 inch) pitch 60degrees serrations on jaws for firstoperations.

8. The back of chuck jaws must beground after hardening.

9. Bore soft jaws with a chucking slugor ring under, or in front of, the topjaw. Do not bore with the slug or ringunder the master jaws. The slug or ringshould be as far as possible from theface of the chuck.

10. Check the top jaws for “bell mouthing”.This can cause the workpiece to move slightlyunder a heavy cut and cause the cutting toolto dig in. This can result in the workpiece beingscrapped or the workpiece coming out of thechuck.

11. Reduce the chucking pressure approximately10% for each inch exceeding 76 mm (3 inches)of jaws height to prevent breaking master jaws,levers, or wedges.

76 mm (3.0 ”)

76 mm (3.0 ”)

3.2 mm (.125”) 60_

60_


ROUGH WORKPIECE

CHUCK

WRAP AROUNDJAW

FRAGILEPART

12. On second operation jaws, use chrome--molysteel such as 4140 or 4150. To strengthen these jawsand resist chipping, heat treat to 28--30 Rc. Whennecessary, they can be true bored.

13. On rough surfaces, use 8615 steel jawsto obtain greater core strength andto resist fracturing under heavy grippingpressure.

14. Use rocking jaws on rough castingsor forgings.

15. Use wrap--around jaws on fragileparts to distribute pressure over alarger area and to minimize distortion.

16. On wedge chucks, grip the workpiece1.6 mm (.06”) from the start of jawtravel for best engagement of wedgewith the master jaw.

17. On lever chucks, grip the workpiece pastthe middle of jaw travel for best grippingconditions.

18. Do not grip another chuck in thejaws of the chuck mounted to the spindle.

19. Although fixtures may be gripped in thejaws of chuck for center location, the jawsmust be not be the sole mounting means.Bolt the fixture to the chuck.


Chapter 4Machine Start Up and Alignment Procedure

Machine Start Up and Alignment Procedure

General

This section describes the operations required to start the machine and alignthe control to the machine.

Start Up and Shut Down Procedures

Start Up

1. Ensure that the machine air supply is turned on and is up topressure.

2. Ensure sufficient hydraulic oil is in the hydraulic tank.

3. Turn the main disconnect switch to the ON position.

4. Press the MASTER START push button on the MTB operatorcontrol panel.

This will apply power to the CNC and initiate a power start of thecontrol. After a few seconds, on successful control power up condition,the CRT will flash the EMG condition indicator.

5. Re--press the MASTER START pushbutton. This will initiate apower--up sequence of the axes and spindle drives and apply power tothe hydraulic unit. The EMG condition indicator is removed from thedisplay.Care must be taken at this time, if the axes are moved under power feedcontrol, as there is no software range checking until the machine hasbeen aligned. See CAUTION.

If the EMERGENCY STOP push button is latched down when theMASTER START push button is pressed in step 3 the CRT will displayEMG ’ALM 1002 EMERGENCY STOP’ alarm. Release the EMER-GENCY STOP push button to clear the alarm.

If an AXIS OVERTRAVEL condition exists at the time of power--up use theaxis power feed controls whilst holding the MASTER START push buttondepressed, the move all axes within their normal operaating range -- seeChapter 5.

Shut Down

The normal safe shut down sequence is as follows:

1. Depress EMERGENCY STOP to ensure a controlled stop sequenceof the axis drives and to turn off the hydraulic motor.

2. Set the main machine power disconnect switch to the OFF position.

CAUTION

Until the machine has beenaligned it is possible to feedthe axes beyond the autho-rized software feed limits.This may result in the remov-al of power to the axis drives.


Machine/Control Alignment Procedure

The operator must perform a machine/control alignment, each time thecontrol is turned on.

The slides and turret are aligned by using the ALIGN push button (A4) onthe operator’s panel.

The automatic alignment procedure first moves each axis to its referenceposition, after which the linear axes are aligned to the control system bymoving each axis a small distance to search for the axis motor encoderreference marker.

The axes are automatically moved to their reference position in a Z,Xsequence. As each axis is aligned to the control system the correspondingaxis powerfeed push button is illuminated. Once all active axes are aligned,the ALIGN push button can be released.

AXIS ALIGNMENT SEQUENCE AXES ALIGNMENT COMPLETEINDICATION

Z

X

Z+ PUSHBUTTON ILLUMINATES

X+ PUSHBUTTON ILLUMINATES

Turret Alignment

On completion of the machine axes alignment, the turret has to be aligned.This is achieved by repressing the ALIGN push button in response to theoperator message: PRESS ALIGN P.B. TO REF TURRET. This will causethe turret to rotate to position 1.

Drive Tool Machines only

The operator message: DRIVEN TOOL SPINDLE NOT ORIENTATED --PRESS HOME PB TO ORIENTATE SPINDLE REFERENCE TURRET.Pressing the home push button will cause the driven tool spindle to orientateand the turret will then rotate to position 1.

Turret alignment must be completed with the X and Z axes at their extremepositive axis positions. See WARNING.

WARNING

Turret alignment can only take place with X and Z axes attheir positive limits. The operator must ensure that, at thisposition, turret rotation will not cause a collision with tool-ing or workpiece.

On successful completion of axes and turret alignment, the ALIGN pushbutton will illuminate and remain illuminated until the machine is switchedoff or an alert is posted which could result in the loss of alignment.


Chapter 5Software and Hardware Axis Overtravel

Software Axis Overtravel

A software axis overtravel conditon occurs if an axis is commanded to gobeyond its normal operating range, indicated by the following alarms:

500 OVER TRAVEL: +X501 OVER TRAVEL: --X500 OVER TRAVEL: +Z501 OVER TRAVEL: --Z

During a software overtravel conditon, the control only permits the axis tomove back from the software overtravel condition.

CANCELLING SOFTWARE RANGE CHECKING

It may sometimes be necessary to temporarily cancel the software rangechecking feature, to enable the axes to be powerfed back to within theirnormal operating ranges.

To cancel software range checking:

1. Turn the main power disconnect switch to the OFF position.

2. After a few seconds set the main power disconnect switch to the onposition.

3. Depress and hold down both P and CAN keys on the MDI keypad.

4. Depress MASTER START to initiate a control power start.

5. Once control is powered up release P and CAN keys on the MDIkeypad.

6. The software range checking is now ineffective and therefore it ispossible to drive an axis beyond its software range limits.

Hardware Axis Overtravel

Prior to completion of machine alignment, it is possible to feed the axesbeyond the authorised software limits. This action may result in a servo failalarm.

It will be necessary to use the following procedure to move the overtravelledaxis back to within its normal operating range.

1. Try to establish the reason why the overtravel condition occurred. If theovertravel occurred for no apparent reason check the general conditionof the axis motor electrical connectors and cables. If the condion ofthese is good proceed with caution.

2. Power down control, isolator off.

3. Power back up control.


4. Select MPG mode.

5. Using the MPG (handwheel) move the axes back within their normaloperating range. The axis jog mode is disabled when the axes are notaligned.

Note: It may be necessary to supress the axis softwarelimits in order tomove the axes back into their normal operating range.


Chapter 6G codes

G codes

The following G codes are supported on the Cincinnati Machine range oflathes.

G--code of group 00 except G10 and G11 are single--shot G--codes.

P/S alarm (no. 010) is displayed when a G--code not listed in the G--Codelist is specified or a G--code without a corresponding option is specified.

G code System A is set as standard.

G--code systems B and C are purchased options -- contact CincinnatiMachine if option is required.

Refer to FANUC Manual B--63084 EN/01 for a complete description of theG Codes.

G CODEGROUP FUNCTION

A B CGROUP FUNCTION

G00 G00 G00 Positioning (Rapid Traverse)

G01 G01 G0101

Linear Interpolation (cutting feed)

G02 G02 G0201

Circular Interpolation CW or Helical interpolation CW

G03 G03 G03 Circular Interpolation CCW or Helical interpolation CCW

G04 G04 G0400

Dwell

G05 G05 G0500

High speed cycle cutting

G07 G07 G07 00 Hypothetical axis interpolation

G07.1(G107)

G07.1(G107)

G07.1(G107)

00

Cylindrical interpolation

G10 G10 G1000

Programmable data input

G11 G11 G11 Programmable data input cancel

G12.1(G112)

G12.1(G112)

G12.1(G112)

21

Polar coordinate interpolation mode

G13.1(G113)

G13.1(G113)

G13.1(G113)

21Polar coordinate interpolation cancel mode

G17 G17 G17 XpYp plane selection

G18 G18 G18 16 ZpXp plane selection

G19 G19 G19 YpZp plane selection

G20 G20 G7006

Input in inch

G21 G21 G7106

Input in mm

G22 G22 G2209

Stored stroke check function on

G23 G23 G2309

Stored stroke check function off



A B CGROUP FUNCTION

G25 G25 G2508

Spindle speed fluctuation detection off

G26 G26 G2608

Spindle speed fluctuation detection on

G27 G27 G27 Reference position return check

G28 G28 G2800

Return to reference position

G30 G30 G3000

2nd, 3rd and 4th reference position return

G31 G31 G31 Skip function

G32 G33 G3301

Thread cutting

G34 G34 G3401

Variable--lead thread cutting

G36 G36 G3600

Automatic tool compensation X

G37 G37 G3700

Automatic tool compensation Z

G40 G40 G40 Tool nose radius compensation cancel

G41 G41 G41 07 Tool nose radius compensation left

G42 G42 G42 Tool nose radius compensation right

G50 G92 G9200

Coordinate system setting or max. spindle speed setting

G50.3 G92.1 G92.100

Workpiece coordinate system preset

G50.2(G250)

G50.2(G250)

G50.2(G250)

20

Polygonal turning cancel

G51.2(G251)

G51.2(G251)

G51.2(G251)

20Polygonal turning

G52 G52 G5200

Local coordinate system setting

G53 G53 G5300

Machine coordinate system setting

G54 G54 G54 Workpiece coordinate system 1 selection


G56 G56 G5614

Workpiece coordinate system 3 selection

G57 G57 G5714

Workpiece coordinate system 4 selection



G65 G65 G65 00 Macro calling

G66 G66 G6612

Macro modal call

G67 G67 G6712

Macro modal call cancel

G68 G68 G6804

Mirror image for double turrets ON or balance cut mode

G69 G69 G6904

Mirror image for double turrets OFF or balance cut mode cancel

G70 G70 G72 Finishing cycle

G71 G71 G73 Stock removal in turning

G72 G72 G74 Stock removal in facing

G73 G73 G75 00 Pattern repeating

G74 G74 G76 End face peck drilling

G75 G75 G77 Outer diameter/internal diameter drilling

G76 G76 G78 Multiple threading cycle



A B CGROUP FUNCTION

G80 G80 G80 Canned cycle for drilling cancel

G83 G83 G83 Cycle for face drilling

G84 G84 G84 Cycle for face tapping

G86 G86 G86 10 Cycle for face boring

G87 G87 G87 Cycle for side drilling

G88 G88 G88 Cycle for side tapping

G89 G89 G89 Cycle for side boring

G90 G77 G20 Outer diameter/internal diameter cutting cycle

G92 G78 G21 01 Thread cutting cycle

G94 G79 G24 Endface turning cycle

G96 G96 G9602

Constant surface speed control

G97 G97 G9702

Constant surface speed control cancel

G98 G94 G9405

Per minute feed

G99 G95 G9505

Per revolution feed

-- G90 G9003

Absolute programming

-- G91 G9103

Incremental programming

-- G98 G9811

Return to initial level (See Explanations 6)

-- G99 G9911

Return to R point level (See Explanations 6)

Assumed at Control Power ON.


Chapter 7M codes

M codes

Miscellaneous codes are programmed using a maximum of one M code perblock with a value range of 0 to 99.

These codes are used to control a variety of machine related functions,including spindle, coolant and tool change.

M codes supported on Cincinnati Turning Centres

M codes marked thus * are available as options or are necessary to supportoptional machine configurations, eg: Parts Catcher, Barfeed, etc.

M codes marked thus * support the Driven Tool option, if fitted.

M CODE FUNCTION

EF

FE

CT

1VE

STA

RT

OF

SP

AN

EF

FE

CT

IVE

AT

EN

DO

FS

PA

N

AS

SU

ME

DA

TC

ON

TR

OL

PO

WE

RO

N

00 PROGRAM STOP n

01 OPTIONAL PROGRAM STOP n

02 END OF PROGRAM n

03 START SPINDLE CCW n

04 START SPINDLE CW n

05 SPINDLE STOP n n

08 COOLANT START n

09 COOLANT STOP n n

13 SPINDLE START CCW WITH COOLANT n

14 SPINDLE START CW WITH COOLANT n

19 ORIENTED SPINDLE STOP n

30 END PROGRAMME & RETURN TO START n

34 * PARTS CATCHER ADVANCE n

35 * PARTS CATCHER RETRACT n n

44 * RENISHAW TOOL SETTING ARM (TSA) UP n

45 * RENISHAW TOOL SETTING ARM (TSA) DOWN n n

46 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE DISABLE (100%) n

47 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE ENABLE n n

48 SPINDLE OVERRIDE DISABLE (100%) n

49 SPINDLE OVERRIDE ENABLE n n

50 ** C--AXIS MODE OFF n n

51 ** C--AXIS MODE ON n

52 ** C--AXIS BRAKE ON (IN--POSITION MODE) n

53 ** C--AXIS BRAKE ON (INTERPOLATION MODE) n

54 ** C--AXIS BRAKE OFF n


M CODE FUNCTION

EF

FE

CT

1VE

STA

RT

OF

SP

AN

EF

FE

CT

IVE

AT

EN

DO

FS

PA

N

AS

SU

ME

DA

TC

ON

TR

OL

PO

WE

RO

N

61 * BARFEED MACRO CALL n

68 * ADVANCE TAILSTOCK QUILL n

69 * RETRACT TAILSTOCK QUILL n n

70 * M70 CUSTOMER OUTPUT n




74 COLLET CHUCK MODE DISABLE n n

75 COLLET CHUCK MODE ENABLE n

76 FORCE TURRET ROTATION CW n

77 FORCE TURRET ROTATION CCW n

78 RELEASE CHUCK JAWS n

79 GRIP CHUCK JAWS n

80 * BARFEED EJECT/RELOAD NEW BAR n

86 * BARFEED PRESSURE ON (HYDRAFEED AND FEEDMASTER ONLY) n

87 * BARFEED PRESSURE OFF (HYDRAFEED AND FEEDMASTER ONLY) n

90 * BARFEED MODE ON n

91 * BARFEED MODE OFF n

92 * BARFEED ROTATION ON n

93 * BARFEED ROTATION OFF n n

94 * INCREMENT PARTS COUNTER (Parameter 6710 = 94) n

98 SUBROUTINE CALL n

99 END SUBROUTINE n

Function Description of M Codes

M00 PROGRAMME STOP (STOPS SPINDLE)

M00 stops the machine cycle at the END of the block in which it isprogrammed. The spindle and coolant are stopped and the machine put outof cycle. Pressing CYCLE START will cause the NC cycle to continue fromthe next block, restarting the spindle and coolant if previously actioned.

M01 OPTIONAL PROGRAMME STOP (STOPS SPINDLE)

M01 has the same function as M00 except it is only actioned if the operatorhas selected the OPTIONAL STOP feature to be active. If the feature is notactive the programme continues without actioning the M01.

M02 END OF PROGRAMME

M02 causes the active programme to terminate and the spindle and coolantto stop.


M03 START SPINDLE CCW

Note: CCW as viewed from Tailstock to Headstock

M03 is used to start the spindle rotation in a counter clockwise direction.The spindle will rotate at the last programmed S word value. If the code isprogrammed in a block containing a none rapid traverse axis motion, thenmotion is inhibited until the spindle is up to speed. If the current block is arapid traverse block the motion will continue until a none rapid block is readwith the spindle not yet at the programmed speed.

M04 START SPINDLE CW

Note: CW as viewed from Tailstock to Headstock

M04 is used to start the spindle rotation in a clockwise direction. The spindlewill rotate at the last programmed S word value. If the code is programmedin a block containing a none rapid traverse axis motion, then motion isinhibited until the spindle is up to speed. If the current block is a rapidtraverse block the motion will continue until a none rapid block is read withthe spindle not yet at the programmed speed.

M05 SPINDLE STOP

M05 is used to stop the spindle. It causes further processing of axis movesor other blocks to be inhibited, until the spindle is stopped.

M08 FLOOD COOLANT START

M08 is used to tun on the flood coolant flow. There is no interlockingbetween the code and block processing, the programmer must allowsufficient feed stoke to assure adequate coolant flow before cutting starts.If dry run is active then this code is inhibited.

M09 COOLANT OFF

M09 is used to turn the coolant off.

M13 START SPINDLE COUNTER CLOCKWISE WITH COOLANT

M13 is used turn on the flood coolant flow and start the spindle in the CCWdirection simultaneously.

M14 START SPINDLE CLOCKWISE WITH COOLANT

M14 is used turn on the flood coolant flow and start the spindle in the CWdirection simultaneously.

M19 ORIENTED SPINDLE STOP

This code stops the spindle/chuck and turns off the coolant. The code forcesthe spindle to stop at a preset ’orient position’ and inhibits further blockprocessing until orientation is complete. M19 is operable when C--AxisMode OFF (M50) is active. In certain instances, the oriented spindle stopmay facilitate the loading and unloading of workpieces.

M30 END OF PROGRAM AND REWIND

M30 terminates the active programme, stops the spindle and coolant flow,and returns the cursor back to the start of the programme.


M34 PARTS CATCHER ADVANCE

M34 moves the parts catcher forward to the collect position. Operator doormust be closed and tool setting arm, if fitted, must be parked.

M35 PARTS CATCHER RETRACT

M35 retracts the parts catcher. Operator door must be closed and tool settingarm, if fitted, must be parked.

M44 RENISHAW TOOL SETTING ARM (TSA) UP

M44 retracts the Renishaw Tool setting arm (TSA) to its parked (stowed)position. Operator door must be closed and parts catcher, if fitted, must beretracted.

M45 RENISHAW TOOL SETTING ARM (TSA) DOWN

M44 retracts the Renishaw Tool setting arm (TSA) to its down (active)position. Operator door must be closed and parts catcher, if fitted, must beretracted.

M46 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE DISABLE (100%)

M46 once programmed inhibits the use of the feedrate override selectorswitch and clamps the programmed feedrate to 100%. It is cancelled onreceipt of any one of the following:--

M47M02M30RESETEMERGENCY STOPOPERATING MODE CHANGE i.e. AUTO TO EDIT

M47 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE ENABLE

M47 is used to cancel M46 and allows the feedrate override selector to beused to modify any programmed feedrate with the exception of the cuttingmotion of a G74 or G84 tapping cycle.

Feedrate override enable is assumed at control power on.

M48 SPINDLE SPEED OVERRIDE DISABLE (100%)

M48 once programmed inhibits the use of the Spindle Speed override keysand clamps the spindle speed to 100% of the programmed speed. It iscancelled on receipt of any one of the following:--

M49M02M30RESETEMERGENCY STOPMODE CHANGE i.e. AUTO TO EDIT

M49 SPINDLE SPEED OVERRIDE ENABLE

M49 is used to cancel M48 and allows the spindle override keys to be usedto modify the programmed spindle speed.


Spindle speed override enable is assumed at control power on.

M50 C--AXIS MODE OFF (Driven Tool Machines only)

M50 cancels C--Axis mode and returns the main spindle/chuck to normalG96/G97 speed control. An S--word associated with a spindle start M--Codewill command the spindle/chuck to rotate at the programmed speed.Processing the M50 code automatically releases the C--Axis brakemechanism. M50 may be programmed when the following functions areactive:M51 takes the machine out of C axis mode. Any S word for speedprogrammed are output to Main Spindle Chuck -- see Chapter 10 ’DrivenTools’.

-- G13.1 Polar Co--ordinate Interpolation OFF-- G40 Tool Nose Radius Compensation OFF-- M05 Spindle Stop

Also see Chapter 10, Driven Tools.

M51 C--AXIS MODE ON (Driven Tool Machines only)

M51 places the machine in C--Axis mode. The main spindle/chuck rotationis programmed via a C--word and any S--word associated with a spindle startM--Code is output to the active Driven Tool Spindle on the turret. M50 maybe programmed when the following functions are active:M51 places themachine in C axis mode, i.e. the main spindle (chuck) is now programmedwith a C word and any S words for speed are output to driven tool spindleon the turret -- see Chapter 10 ’Driven Tools’.

-- G13.1 Polar Co--ordinate Interpolation OFF-- G40 Tool Nose Radius Compensation OFF-- M05 Spindle Stop

Note; The operator access door is held latched whilst M51 is active, evenwhen the machine is not in--cycle. If a cycle is interupted whenC--Axis mode is active the M50 code (C--Axis mode Off) must beprocessed to release the door latch.


M52 C--AXIS BRAKE ON (In--Position Mode, Driven Tool Fea-tureDriven tool machines only)

M52 applies a mechanical brake ON to the stationary spindle/chuck. Thebrake provides the necessary workpiece rigidity for certain machiningoperations using Driven Tools mounted in the turret.

The M52 code is functional when C--Axis mode is set ON, i.e: M51 active.The M52 function remains ON until cancelled by:--

M50 -- C--Axis Mode OFFM53 -- C--Axis Brake ON (Interpolation Mode)M54 -- C--Axis Brake OFF

M52 is programmed in a block prior to a C--Axis rapid motion command.


M53 C--AXIS BRAKE ON-- (Interpolation Mode, Driven Tool Fea-ture)Half pressure -- contouring(Driven tool machines only)


M53 applies a mechanical brake partially ON to the spindle/chuck. Thebrake provides a degree of dampening and stability to the spindle/chuckduring profile milling operations, using Driven Tools mounted in the turret.Brake pressure control and adjustment is given in Chapter 3 of this manual.


M50 -- C--Axis Mode OFFM52 -- C--Axis Brake ON (In--Position Mode)M54 -- C--Axis Brake OFF

M53 is programmed in or before the first C--Axis feed motion block.


M54 C--AXIS BRAKE OFF (Driven Tool Machines only)

M54 releases the brake from the spindle/chuck. The brake must be releasedusing the M54 code prior to subsequent rotation of the spindle/chuck underC--Axis positioning control.


M52 -- C--Axis Brake ON (In--Position Mode)M53 -- C--Axis Brake ON (Interpolation Mode)

C--Axis Brake OFF command is also included in the functionality of theC--Axis Mode OFF (M50) code.

M54 is programmed in a block following a C--Axis motion command.


M61 BARFEED MACRO CALL

M61 is used to call the Barfeed macro to eject the billet and reload a newbar. Refer to chapter 13 for a description of the barfeed macro.

M68 ADVANCE TAILSTOCK QUILL

M68 advances the tailstock quill.

M69 RETRACT TAILSTOCK QUILL

M69 retracts the tailstock quill.

M70 TO M73 CUSTOMER OUTPUTS (OPTIONAL)

These codes can be used by a customer to switch on any ancillary equipmentthat he chooses to operate via the part programme.

If the M70 -- M73 option is provided, the machine will be equipped with four110V AC triac modules and four 24V DC feedback terminals, for wiringdetails refer to the machines Electrical Schematic diagram.

M70 -- M73 can be configured to operate in 1 of 2 different modes:--

1) M70 -- M73 outputs turn on and remain on until a differentM70 -- M73 code is programmed


2) M70 -- M73 outputs turn on and remain on until thecorresponding feedback input is obtained.

M74 COLLET CHUCK MODE DISABLE

M74 places the control/machine back into normal chucking mode.Programmed in MDI mode only.

M75 COLLET CHUCK MODE ENABLE

M75 places the control/machine in collet chuck mode. Programmed in MDImode only.

M76 FORCE TURRET ROTATION CW

M76 forces turret rotation to be in the clockwise direction. (Normal turretrotational is by shortest path). Refer to chapter 9 for a description of the useof M76.

M77 FORCE TURRET ROTATION CCW

M77 forces turret rotation to be in the clockwise direction. (Normal turretrotational is by shortest path). Refer to chapter 9 for a description of the useof M77.

M78 CHUCK OPEN

M78 opens the chuck jaws, whether a conventional chuck or a collet chuckis used. Used for Barfeed and Bar--puller applications.

M79 CHUCK CLOSE

M79 closes the chuck jaws, whether a conventional chuck or a collet chuckis used. Used for Barfeed and Bar--puller applications.

M80 BARFEED EJECT/RELOAD NEW BAR

M80 is used only in macro O9020 -- Barfeed macro. Refer to chapter 13 fora description of the barfeed macro.

M86 BARFEED PRESSURE ON(HYDRAFEED AND FEEDMASTER ONLY)

M86 switches on Barfeed pressure to push the bar out of the Barfeeder.Refer to chapter 13 for a description of the barfeed unit.

M87 BARFEED PRESSURE OFF(HYDRAFEED AND FEEDMASTER ONLY)

M86 switches off Barfeed pressure. Refer to chapter 13 for a description ofthe barfeed unit.

M90 BARFEED MODE ON

M90 places the control in Barfeed mode. Programmed in MDI mode only.Refer to chapter 13 for a description of the barfeed unit.

M91 BARFEED MODE OFF

M91 takes the control out of Barfeed mode. Programmed in MDI modeonly. Refer to chapter 13 for a description of the barfeed unit.


M92 BARFEED ROTATION ON

M92 rotates the spindle/chuck at a preset slow speed to assist barfeedadvance. See Chapter 13, Barfeeder.M92 reduces chuck rotation to a “jog”value set by Keep Relays. Spindle rotation will be clockwise (CW asviewedfrom Tailstock to Headstock) -- see chapter 13 ’Barfeeder’.

M93 BARFEED ROTATION OFF

M93 stops spindle/chuck rotation. See Chapter 13, Barfeeder.M93 stopschuck rotation -- see chapter 13 ’Barfeeder’

M94 INCREMENT PARTS COUNTER

M94 increments the parts counter (when parameter 6710 is set to 94).M94will increment the parts counter when parameter 6710 is set to 94.

M98 SUBROUTINE CALL

Refer to GE Fanuc operators manual.

M99 END OF SUBROUTINE

Refer to GE Fanuc operators manual.


Chapter 8Spindle Functions

Spindle Functions

The machine is fitted with a Headstock driven by an infinitely variable ACmotor. Spindle speeds are specified in direct rpm (in 1rpm increments) byan S word. For spindle speed range, refer to Machine Specification, chapter2, in this manual.

The maximum programmable spindle speed may be set to a value belowmaximum RPM of the machine using the G92 Sxxxx command, see GEFanuc Operators Manual II Programming, Chapter 9.

The spindle rotation is started by programming an M03, M04, M13 or M14code. The spindle may also be restarted by pressing the SPINDLE CW orSPINDLE CCW pushbuttons.

M03 causes the spindle to rotate in a counter clockwise direction and M04causes clockwise rotation. CW and CCW are viewed from Tailstock toHeadstock. If the spindle is attempted to be restarted after an auto cycleinterrupt, and the spindle CW or CCW pushbutton used does not match thelast programmed spindle direction then the spindle restart is rejected and theoperator prompted accordingly.

Rapid axis moves are permitted to continue while the spindle is acceleratingor decelerating. Programmed feed moves are not actioned until the spindlereaches its commanded speed.

The following functions cause the spindle to stop:--

1. M00 Programme stop

2. M01 Optional stop (when selected)

3. M02 End of programme

4. M05 Spindle stop

5. M30 End of tape

6. Spindle stop pushbutton

7. Alerts generating spindle stop

Driven Tool Machines

When the machine is in C--Axis mode -- M51 programmed -- the mainspindle (chuck) is programmed with a C word along with an appropriatefeedrate.

All S words for speed are output to driven tool spindle on the turret, as withnormal rotation it must be started by programming an M03, M04, M13 orM14.

The above seven functions which stop the main spindle (chuck) also applyto the driven tool spindle.

The below spindle jog does not apply to the Driven tool spindle, only themain chuck spindle.


Spindle Jog

This feature allows the spindle to be jogged at approximately 8 RPM whilstdepressing either the SPINDLE CW or SPINDLE CCW pushbuttonproviding the machine is not in cycle or a cycle interrupted condition, andthe operator door is closed. Spindle jogging is provided to allow hands offspindle workpiece inspection.


Chapter 9Tooling Functions

Tool Turret

The turret disc is directly mounted onto a servo driven turret indexing head.Both 8 and 12 position Turrets are available in the Hawk range of turningcentres.

Fig. 5012 Position Turret -- showing Rotation Directions

Turret Indexes

The turret can be indexed at any point within the programmable range of themachine.

Normal turret indexes are bi--directional and shortest path. Forcing turretdirection can be used -- see below.

To keep cycle time to a minimum, it is often desireable to keep the retractfor a turret index to a minimum. It is therefore up to the operator/program-mer to ensure that a turret index does not cause a collision. See WARNING.

Driven Tool Machines

On Driven Tool machines, turret indexes may require an orientation of thedriven tool before a turret index can take place. This is to correctly positionthe drive mechanism inside the turret before indexing.

WARNING

When indexing the turretmake sure that the indexingradius of the longest toolwill clear the workpiece/chuck and axis way guard-ing, so that a collision doesnot occur.

Failure to follow this warn-ing may result in personalinjury and/or machine dam-age.


T Word

A 4--digit T code is programmed to select a turret position.

The first 2 digits represent the turret position, the second 2 digits representthe offset number.

T xx xx

Tool offset number

Turret position

Programming example:

N130 G00 X200 Z300 -- Move to a safe turret index positionN140 T0505 -- Index to turret position 5 and use Offset value

No. 5.N150 X150 Z237 -- Next machining block

Force Turret CW and CCW

As mentioned previously normal turret indexes are bi--directional andshortest path. The following two M--codes are used to force the turretrotation in a particular direction:--

M76 -- Force turret rotation clockwise (CW)M77 -- Force turret rotation counter clockwise (CCW)

These two M--codes are non--modal being active only on the block in whichthey are programmed. Both M--codes must be programmed on the sameblock as a T--code.

e.g. N130 T0707 M76 -- Index turret CW to position 7.

Tool Life Management

Refer to GE FANUC operators manual (B--63084EN/01) for a fulldescription of this feature.


Chapter 10Driven Tools

Introduction

The Driven Tools feature enables cutting tools mounted in the turret stationsto be rotating tools. Drills, taps, boring tools, milling cutters, etc., may bemounted in the turret to perform specific rotating tool machining tasks inassociation with the spindle/chuck operating in C--Axis positioning/inter-polating mode (M51) active.

In C--Axis mode (M51), the spindle/chuck may be positioned in rapid orfeedrate mode. Feedrate mode is adopted for profile milling applicationsunder Cylindrical Interpolation (G07.1) mode, or Polar Co--ordinateInterpolation (G12.1) control. When interpolation modes G07.1 and G12.1are turned off, the C--Axis is best utilised in a positioning role for holemaking operations, for which the spindle/chuck moves to position at rapidrate.

C--Axis Mode Enable/Disable

The C--Axis mode of operation may be enabled/disabled when the followinggroup of Gxx and Mxx codes are active:

-- G40 Tool Nose Radius Compensation OFF-- M05 Spindle Stop-- G13.1 Polar Co--ordinate Interpolation OFF-- G07.1 C0 Cylindrical Interpolation OFF-- Mxx

where:

Mxx = M51 C--Axis Mode Enable(Spindle/Chuck in C--Axis mode ON)orM52 C--Axis Mode Disable(Spindle/Chuck in C--Axis mode OFF)

The codes should be processed in the order shown.

C--Axis Initialisation

Once in C--Axis mode, it is necessary to rotate the spindle/chuck to theC--Axis origin position prior to processing any specific C--Axis positioningcommand. The recommended block sequence for C--Axis initialisation isgiven below:

G40M05G13.1M51G0 G28 C0 Rotate spindle/chuck to C--Axis zero position.

C--Axis Positioning Mode

Once the C--Axis is initialised, it may operate in positioning mode using thebasic contouring mode G--codes G00 and G01. The Tool Nose RadiusCompensation feature (G40 -- G42) does not perform correctly in this mode


and should be utilised in the interpolation mode of C--Axis application.C--Axis positioning mode is best utilised for hole making operationsincorporating standard canned cycles to perform drill, tap and bore cycles.

Programming Considerations

1. Positioning Mode Operation

Driven tools operating parallel to the Z--Axis perform ’Front’ machiningcycles. Driven tools mounted in a right angle head on the turret (operatingparallel to the X--Axis) perform ’Side’ machining cycles. See Fig. 51.

Fig. 51Driven Tool Setup -- Positioning Mode

2. C--Axis Position Command

The C--Axis command defines the angular position in degrees around theworkpiece.

Fig. 52C--Axis Positioning

The figure above shows the spindle/chuck at the C 0.000 degree position.A positive C--Axis command (eg: C 0.000 to C+90) is seen as a CW rotation


of the spindle/chuck to the +90 degree position. A negative C--Axiscommand (eg: C 0,000 to C--90) is seen as a CCW rotation of thespindle/chuck to the --90 degree position. The C--Axis should be treated asa linear axis in which there is only one zero degree point. A command fromthe zero point to C--1440 results in the spindle/chuck rotating fourrevolutions in the CCW direction to the minus 1440 degree position.

3. Canned Cycle Operation

Specific rules for establishing R and Z/X positions are as follows:

a) The R--plane level measured from the Initial Position is a radialdistance and is normally negative.

b) The canned cycle hole depth is expressed as a Z--word in FrontMachining mode and as an X--word in Side Machining mode. HoleDepth is measured as the distance from the hole bottom to the positionof the axis program zero. Specifically in Side Machining mode, thehole depth X--value is expressed as a ’diameter’ distance from X0, theworkpiece centre of rotation. Hole Depth Z or X commands arenormally negative.

For further detailed information concerning Canned Cycle operation, referto GE FANUC Operators Manual, publication B--63084EN/01, II--Pro-gramming, Chapter 13.3.

Example 1: Canned Cycle -- Front Machining

Fig. 53Canned Cycle -- Front Machining

N65 G0 G98 G40 Tool Radius Offset CancelN70 M5 Spindle StopN75 M50 C--Axis Mode OffN80 G13.1 Polar Co--ordinate Interpolation OffN85 G07.1 C0 Cylindrical Interpolation OffN90 G28 U0 W0 XZ Retraction to Align Reference PointN95 T0404 Tool SelectionN100 M51 C--Axis Mode OnN105 M54 C--Axis Brake OffN110 G0 G28 C0 Initialise C--Axis at zero degree position


N115 M8 Coolant OnN120 F100 S760 M3 Feed/Speed (CW) for Driven ToolN125 X150 Z20 C90 Rapid XC to Hole Position/Z at ClearanceN130 M52 C--Axis Brake OnN135 G83 R--18 Z--30 Drill 30mm Deep/Retract to Initial PositionN140 M54 C--Axis Brake OffN145 G0 C180 Rotate C--Axis to 180 degree positionN150 M52 C--Axis Brake OnN155 G83 R--18 Z--30 Drill 30mm Deep/Retract to Initial PositionN160 M54 C--Axis Brake OffN165 G0 C270 Rotate C--Axis to 270 degree positionN170 M52 C--Axis Brake OnN175 G83 R--18 Z--30 Drill Hole 30mm DeepN180 G80 M9 Cancel G83 Canned Cycle/Coolant OffN185 M5 Spindle StopN190 M50 C--Axis Mode Off/C--Axis Brake Off

Example 2: Canned Cycle -- Side Machining

Fig. 54Canned Cycle -- Side Machining

N265 G0 G99 G40 Tool Radius Offset CancelN270 M5 Spindle StopN275 M50 C--Axis Mode OffN280 G13.1 Polar Co--ordinate Interpolation OffN285 G07.1 Cylindrical Interpolation OffN290 G28 U0 W0 XZ Retraction to Align Reference PointN295 T0505 Tool SelectionN300 M51 C--Axis Mode OnN305 M54 C--Axis Brake OffN310 G0 G28 C0 Initialise C--Axis at zero degree positionN315 M8 Coolant OnN320 F100 S760 M3 Feed/Speed (CW) for Driven ToolN325 X150 Rapid X--Axis to ClearanceN330 Z--15 C90 Rapid ZC Axes to +90 degree positionN335 M52 C--Axis Brake OnN340 G87 X10 R--23 Q15000 Peck Drill Through/Retract to R--positionN345 M54 C--Axis Brake OffN350 G0 C--90 Rapid C--Axis to --90 degree position


N355 M52 C--Axis Brake OnN360 G87 X10 R--23 Q15000 Peck Drill Through/Retract to R--positionN365 G80 M9 Cancel G87 Canned Cycle/Coolant OffN370 M5 Spindle StopN375 M50 C--Axis Mode Off/C--Axis Brake Off

C--Axis Interpolation Mode

Selection of Interpolation mode allows the machine to perform a variety ofmilling operations to the workpiece billet, from simple flat surfacegeneration to complex profile machining. There are two interpolationfunctions which may be selected when the C--Axis is active and initialised;these are:

-- Polar Co--ordinate Interpolation (G12.1).-- Cylindrical Interpolation (G07.1).

Programming Considerations

1. Interpolation Mode Operation

Profile milling of the end face of a billet is controlled via Polar Co--ordinateInterpolation with the driven tool mounted directly in the turret station. SeeFig. 55. Milling operations peformed along the length of a billet iscontrolled via Cylindrical Interpolation with the driven tool mounted in aright angle head from the turret station. See Fig. 55.

Fig. 55Driven Tool Setup -- Interpolation Mode

2. C--Axis Position Command

In Polar Co--ordinate Interpolation (G12.1) mode, the C--Axis is consideredas a linear axis with metric (or imperial) measuring units. The X--C plance(see Fig. 56), programmed in Cartesian co--ordinates defines the end facemachining of a workpiece billet.


Fig. 56C--Axis Position Command

In Cylindrical Interpolation (G07.1) mode, the C--Axis units remain indegrees measured around the billet periphery. The development of thecylinder into a Z--C plance (see Fig. 56) and programmed in Cartesianco--ordinates, defines the area around and along the length of the workpiecebillet.

3. Programming Rules

-- The chosen interpolation mode may be turned on once the C--Axis isactive and initialised.

-- When the interpolation mode is active:

-- G00 rapid positioning mode is not allowed.

-- Tool Nose Radius Compensation (G41/G42) may be applied, butmust be cancelled (G40) prior to terminating the interpolationmode.

-- M53 C--Axis brake (for profile milling) may be applied to offerstability to the metal cutting action. See Chapter 3 of this manualfor Brake Pressure Control and Adjustment details.

-- G12.1 Polar Co--ordinate Interpolation mode -- ONG13.1 Polar Co--ordinate Interpolation mode -- OFF

-- G107.1 Hxxx.xxx Cylindrical Interpolation -- ONwhere Hxxx.xxx is the radius of the cylinder

G107 C0 Cylindrical Interpolation OFF

For Polar Co--ordinate Interpolation:

-- X co--ordinate is a ’diameter’ value.-- C co--ordinate is a ’radius’ value.-- I co--ordinate is the incremental distance to the X--Axis centre

point position for circular interpolation.-- J co--ordinate is the incremental distance to the C--Axis centre

point position for circular interpolation.


For Cylindrical Interpolation:

-- Z co--ordinate is the actual position value along the billet.-- C co--ordinate is the actual angular position around the billet.-- R co--ordinate is the radius value for circular interpolation. Centre

point co--ordinates are not allowed.-- The G18 interpolation plane must be established prior to invoking

Cylindrical Interpolation mode.i.e: G18 W0 H0

where, W is the incremental mode address for the Z--Axis.and H is the incremental mode address for the C--Axis.

-- The radius of cylinder (H--word) is specified in the G07.1 blockwhen turning on Cylindrical Interpolation mode. It is not possibleto change the cylinder radius until Cylindrical Interpolation is firstturned off and then turned on again with the desired cylinderradius.

Example 1: Polar Co--ordinate Interpolation

The example below is to be read in conjunction with the Polar Co--ordinateInterpolation feature description given in the GE FANUC OperatorsManual, publication B--63084EN/01, II Programming, Chapter 4.4.

Fig. 57Polar Co--ordinate Interpolation

N0186 G0 G18 G40 G97 G99 TNRC Off. Speed in RPM. Feed/Rev.N0187 M5 Spindle StopN0188 M50 C--Axis Mode OffN0189 G13.1 Polar Co--ordinate Interpolation OffN0190 G07.1 C0 Cylindrical Interpolation OffN0191 G28 U0 W0 XZ Retraction to Align Reference PointN0192 T0404 Tool SelectionN0193 M51 C--Axis Mode OnN 0194 M54 C--Axis Brake OffN0195 G0 G28 C0 Initialise C--Axis at zero degree positionN0196 M8 Coolant On


N0197 S1000 M3 Spindle Start (CW) for Driven ToolN0198 X120 Z20 C0 Advance to clearance positionN0199 M53 C--Axis Brake partially OnN0200 G12.1 Polar Co--ordinate Interpolation OnN0201 G42 G1 X40 F0.15 TNRC On/Feed to profileN0202 C10 )N0203 G03 X20 C20 R10 ) Geometry ProgramN0204 G01 X--40 ) (program based on CartesianN0205 C--10 ) Co--ordinates on X--C’ plane)N0206 G03 X--20 C--20 I10 J0 )N0207 G01 X40 Feed to Profile CornerN0208 C0 Feed to start point on profileN0209 G40 X120 F5 M09 Fast Feed to clearance/Coolant OffN0210 G13.1 Polar Co--ordinate Interpolation OffN0211 M5 Spindle StopN0212 M50 C--Axis Mode Off

Example 2: Cylindrical Interpolation

The example below is to be read in conjunction with the CylindricalInterpolation feature description given in the GE FANUC OperatorsManual, publication B--63084EN/01, II Programming, Chapter 4.5. TheCylindrical Interpolation example program given in that chapter is to beignored.

Fig. 58Cylindrical Interpolation

N0286 G0 G40 G97 G99 TNRC Off. Speed in RPM. Feed/Rev.N0287 M5 Spindle StopN0288 M50 C--Axis Mode OffN0289 G13.1 Polar Co--ordinate Interpolation OffN0290 G07.1 C0 Cylindrical Interpolation OffN0291 G28 U0 W0 XZ Retraction to Align Reference PointN0292 T0404 Tool SelectionN0293 M51 C--Axis Mode On


N0294 M54 C--Axis Brake OffN0295 G0 G28 C0 Initialise C--Axis at zero degree positionN0296 M8 Coolant OnN0297 S1000 M3 Spindle Start (CW) for Driven ToolN0298 G00 Z100 X125 C0 Rapid Advance to Start PointN0299 M53 C--Axis Brake partially OnN0300 G01 X100 F.15 Feed Advance to Cutting DepthN0301 G19 W0 H0 Zet Z--C Interpolation PlaneN0302 G07.1 H60 Cylindrical Interpolation OnN0303 G01 G42 Z120 F.25 TNRC On/Feed to profileN0304 C30 )N0305 G02 Z90 C60 R30 )N0306 G01 Z70 )N0307 G03 Z60 C70 R10 ) Geometry ProgramN0308 G01 C150 ) (Program based on CartesianN0309 G03 Z70 C190 R75 ) Co--ordinates on Z--C plane)N0310 G01 Z110 C230 )N0311 G02 Z120 C270 R75 )N0312 G01 C360 )N0313 G40 Z100 TNRC Off/Feed to Start PointN0314 G07.1 C0 Cylindrical Interpolation OffN0315 M54 C--Axis Brake OffN0316 X125 F5 M09 Fast Feed to Clearance/Coolant OffN0317 M5 Spindle StopN0318 M50 C--Axis Mode Off


Chapter 11Toolsetter

Introduction

This chapter describes how to use the Renishaw Tool Setting Arm (TSA)and the Renishaw High Precision Manual Tool Setting Arm (HPA)incorporating Renishaw macro “Type B” tool setting software. Thedocumentation in this chapter has been reproduced with kind permission ofRenishaw plc.

The documentation and macro programs may not be reproduced, stored ortransmitted, wholly or in part, in any form or by any means, without priornotice.

TSA

The Renishaw Tool Setting Arm (TSA) consists of a Motorised Hub, an armwhich can be configured for different applications, an electronic interfaceand a probe.

The TSA is used for setting X and Z Tool offsets.

Fig. 59Probe Configuration


HPA

The Renishaw High Precision Manual Toolsetting Arm consists of Baseassembly, Arm assembly and probe stylus. The HPA is a manually loadedarm which, like the TSA, is used for setting X and Z tool offsets.

Fig. 60Probe Configuration

4mm AF Allen key

1. Base2. Manual Locking Lever3. Protective Cover4. Arm Assembly5. Alignment Marker6. M5x20 Socket Head Capscrew (3 off)7. Clamping Collar8. Stylus Assembly

Macro Probing Routines

Probing routines (macros) are protected and stored within the main partprogram memory.

Macro No. Description Memory Used

O9011 Semi Manual Tool Setting 3.7 kbO9012 Auto Tool Setting 2.4 kb

NOTE: Macro O9012 is not available with the HPA Manual Tool SettingArm.

Manual Tool Setting

The “Manual Tool Setting” MACRO O9011 will suit users who want toposition the tool close to the stylus using Jog Mode before setting a tool.When using this method, it is not necessary to load any approximate tooldata in the Tool Offset registers prior to running a cycle.

NOTE: ALL tool movements within the macro are restricted to the (Bb)box distance (default 6mm (0.236in) maximum movement, andthe moves are fully protected in the event of a collision.


Auto Tool Setting -- TSA only

The “Auto Tool Setting” MACRO O9012 can be used to automaticallyposition the tool to the stylus as well as set the tool. It will be necessary toload nominal tool data in the Tool Offset registers prior to running a cycle.If using the macro for calibration, it will also be necessary to enter nominalcalibration data.

Operator and Programming Notes

1. Macro O9011 can be called with G124

2. Macro O9012 can be called with G125 -- TSA only

3. Probing macros can be called in MDI and Memory modes of operation.

4. Probing feedrates are automatically converted to suit inch or metricprogramming.

5. Tool setting routines inhibit the use of the feedrate override control.The Feed hold push button is still active.

6. An active feedrate (programmed prior to invoking a tool settingroutine) is not retained on completion of the tool setting routine, andmust be reprogrammed as necessary.

7. See chapter 14 for a list of variables used by Renishaw TSA macros.

8. When the HPA is fitted to the machine -- locked in position -- turretindex/jogs can only occur if the turret is at the Z--axis high limit.

Tool Setting Arm Activation -- TSA

The Tool Setting Arm (TSA) is moved to its active (down) and stowed (up)position in two ways:--

1. M44/M45 M--codes

2. Operator panel membrane keys

M44 TSA Up

M44 retracts the TSA to its parked -- up (stowed) position. Operator doormust be closed and parts catcher, if fitted, must be retracted.

M45 TSA Down

M45 moves the TSA to its down (active) position. Operator door must beclosed and parts catcher, if fitted, must be retracted.

Program example using M44 and M45

O0001 (TOOL PROBE) Program numberG21G90G0G0X150Z230M9 Safe start positionM45 TSA downT0404 Turret index to position 4 with offset 04G98 Feed per minuteG125 Call macro O9012M44 TSA upG0X150Z230 Back to safe positionM30 End of program


Tool Setting Arm Down Pushbutton

This pushbutton is used to jog the Renishaw Tool Setting Arm (TSA) to itsdown position -- Active position.


Tool Setting Arm Up Pushbutton

This pushbutton is used to jog the Renishaw Tool Setting Arm (TSA) to itsup position -- Stowed position.


HPA -- Manual Toolsetting Arm

Fitting Arm

1. Remove the Protective cover (protective cap) by rotating the ManualLocking lever anticlockwise.

2. Locate the tool setting arm on the base, lining up the alignment market(”Red Dot”) with the locking lever.

3. Rotate locking lever clockwise to lock the arm in position. Probe isnow armed.

Removing Arm

1. Rotate the locking lever anticlockwise and remove the arm.

2. Locate the protective cap on the base, lining up the alignment marker(”Red Dot”) with the locking lever.

3. Rotate locking lever clockwise to lock the cap in position.

TSA/HPA Calibration

TSA/HPA calibration must be performed for the following reasons:--

S If it is the first time your probe system is to be used

S If a new stylus is fitted to your probe

S If it is suspected that the stylus has become distorted or that the probehas crashed

S At regular intervals to compensate for mechanical changes of yourmachine tool

S If repeatability of relocation of the probe in its operating position ispoor. In this case, the probe may need to be re--calibrated each time it isselected.

Two different operations are used to calibrate a probe. They are:--

1. Calibrating using the Manual Cycle -- macro O9011

2. Calibrating using the Auto Cycle -- macro O9012 -- TSA only


Stylus Alignment

When the probe system is assembled and mounted on the machine, thealignment must be set and position of the stylus must be found, before theTool Setting cycles can be used.

Stylus Alignment

The faces of the cube stylus are accurately manufactured to be square andparallel to each other, so aligning just one face will automatically align allfaces. Adjust the stylus face height so that the faces are central about thespindle centre line.

Check that the stylus faces are aligned with the machine axes. It can beuseful to use a tool mounted in the turret as a stylus triggering device. Themachine coordinates at the trigger point can be compared to a second triggerpoint further along the stylus face. Usually alignment to within 0.010mm(0.0004in) is recommended, but this depends on the application.

Stylus Position

When calibrating for the first time it is recommended to use the macroO9011 Manual Cycle. Calibration must be made with a Master Tool ofknown dimensions. It is not necessary to have any idea of the stylus facecoordinates because the macro runs incrementally from a start point anddetermines the calibration values based on the Master Tool dimensions. Itcan sometimes be done using the turret faces, using zero (0) Master Tooldimensions.

Control Options

The following features must be installed to support the Tool SettingSoftware.

S Fanuc G31 Standard or High Speed Skip must be installed andoperational.

S Fanuc user macro ’B’ programming option (standard on Hawk lathes).

S Sufficient part program memory to install this package together withworking part programs.

Standard Calibration Data -- Base Number 522

Calibration data will be stored in the following macro variables using thedefault Base Number.

#522 = X+ Cube face#523 = X-- Cube face#524 = Z+ Cube face#525 = Z-- Cube face#526 = Y+ Cube face#527 = Y-- Cube face#530 = X direction stylus size#531 = Z direction stylus size


Adjusting the Software Back Off Distance

The software will use the standard back off distance of 1mm, which isadequate for most installations.

If the cycle will not run when installed, examine the tool measuringmovements when triggering on the stylus. If the tool does not retract off thesurface sufficiently after the first touch to enable a reseat of the probe, theback off distance should be increased to suit.

Edit variable as follows in macro O9011.

#529 = 1.0 ..... Change value to suit -- factory set.

NOTE: If when running a cycle the machine axes do not move and NOalarm is generated, check that the relevant ’G’ code for feed / minhas been selected.

Macro Parameters

Below is a list of all possible macro parameters for O9011 and O9012macros.

NOTE: It is recommended to use the decimal point with all input data,however, it may be possible on some machines to omit this.

Entering Input Data on the cycle call line will override anyother default conditions.

Bb b= The box distance that the tool will move within, once moved tothe start position in front of the stylus (Default = 6mm (.236in)

Cc c= The cutter diameter offset. This may be used to set a cutter/drillto its centreline position by touching the stylus on one edge.(Default = 0)

NOTE: Cc can also be used during a calibration cycle and only withvectors H5, H6, H7, H8.

Hh h= The Tool Nose Vector. This is used to select the correct tool pathmovements and measuring direction for the type of tool.

NOTE: The Tool Nose Vector will be taken from the Tool Offset pageunder the ’T’ address by default if Hh is not used.

Tt t= Tool Offset number. This selects the Tool Offset number to be set.(Default will use the current active tool offset number, or the Toolnumber if the offset is not active.

NOTE: The Tool Offset will be the active Tool Offset, or the Tool Sta-tion if the Tool Offset is not active by default if Tt is not used.

The input is also used to define the Tool Offset where the Mas-ter Tool dimensions are stored when calibrating the ProbeStylus.

K1. 1.= This is used to indicate a Probe Stylus calibration cycle. One ortwo adjacent stylus faces will be set depending on the H inputused.


K2 2.= This is used to indicate a Probe Stylus calibration cycle. As forK1, but the OPPOSITE stylus face will also be set. This methodwill allow all faces of the stylus to be calibrated by touching onany two adjacent faces. (Experience stylus dimensions for thestylus size must be entered in #530 and #531 before this featurecan be used).

When K2 is used, the opposite stylus faces will be found by calculation.

Example:X-- stylus face = X+ stylus face -- #530Z-- stylus face = Z+ stylus face -- #531

Typical values for a 10mm (0.3937in) cube stylus.

#530 = 19.940 (0.7850in) X diameter/radial width#531 = 9.970 (0.3925in) Z axis width

NOTE: When Kk is not used, tool setting is assumed. Do not mix K1and K2 inputs on the same call line.

Mm m= Broken tool checking tolerance (M.2 indicates a +2/--2 tolerance)(Default = 0).

Rr r= Approach position in front of stylus (Default = 25mm [0.984in])

Ww

Ww

Uu

Uu

Uu u= X axis tool tip geometry POSITIONING adjustment. This isadditional to the Bb distance. (Default = 0).

Ww w= Z axis tool tip geometry POSITIONING adjustment. This isadditional to the Bb distance. (Default = 0).

*Xx x= X axis Tool Offset RESULT adjustment amount. (Default = 0).

*Zz z= Z axis Tool Offset RESULT adjustment amount. (Default = 0).

NOTE: * These values can be used tomake small compensations to thesetting results. In applications where the nominal tool lengthsare allowed for by the machining program, zero nominal val-ues must be set in the tool registers. This is achieved by enter-ing the tool geometry amounts in the Xx and Zz values.


Tool Nose Vector Hh

S The tool movement directions will be established by the selection of asuitable Hh vector number.

S Tools must be positioned to one of the positions shown according to thetype of tool when using the Manual Cycle macro O9011.

S Hh numbers correspond with the ’T’ address on the Tool Offset page.

H8

Bb

H3

H7

H2H6H1

H5

H4

X+

X+

Z+

Bb

H6 H2

H7

H3H8H4

H5

H1

REARTURRETMACHINE

FRONTTURRETMACHINE


Calibration

Manual Calibration -- Macro O9011

Introduction

Calibration is achieved using macro O9011 directly as described here, orindirectly by using the Auto cycle O9012, which will also automaticallyposition the Master Tool to the stylus for you.

If using the Auto Cycle macro O9012, approximate calibration data MUSTbe entered in the calibration data variables before calibrating.

Macro O9012 is not available with the HPA.

Description

The Probe must first be ’jogged’ to its down position using the TSA downpush button, or manually fitted in the case of the HPA.

The Master Tool must be selected in MDI mode and positioned in JOG orHANDWHEEL mode to a suitable start position. The cycle will move theMaster Tool from the start position to the stylus face(s) as specified by theTool Nose Vector Hh and then retract back to the start position. Calibrationvalues are found for the stylus.

Application

a) The Probe Stylus faces must be set parallel to the axes.

b) The Master Tool Offset Data must be entered in the Tool Offset registerpage before running the calibration.

c) The Master Tool and Offset number should be selected using MDImode, so that the screen information about the current tool is updated.

d) Prepare a simple program to call the cycle using either the G124 orG65P9011 command and enter the K1. or K2. Input to indicate that acalibration cycle is required. Enter other optional inputs. (See MacroParameters).

e) Position the tool at a suitable start point in JOG or HANDWHEELmode within the Bb box distance.

f) Run the G124 cycle.

Format

[ ] denote optional parameters.

G124 Kk [Bb Cc Hh Tt]Alternative:G65 P9011 Kk [Bb Cc Hh Tt]

Example: G124K1.B10.C10.H3.T2.

Macro Parameters

Kk Bb Cc Hh Tt


Outputs

Calibration values for each stylus face can be found. The values aredistances to the stylus faces in machine coordinates.

X+

Z+

Stylus

#531

(#511)

#530

(#510)

#524

(#504)

#525

(#505)

#522

(#502)

#523

(#503)

NOTE: If the machine is set for diameter programming, then the #530variable must be diametral.

Example 1 -- Calibration

Master

Tool

H3

When the program is run, the stylus calibration values are stored in #522 and#524 (+X, +Z faces). To set the opposite faces of cube #523 and #525 (--X,--Z faces), a new vector Hh must be used in with a different style MasterTool.

Alternative: The K2. Input can be used to calibrate all four stylus faces. (Seethe Kk input description in Chapter 3 -- Inputs).

NOTE: Position the Master Tool within the box distance Bb from theface(s) of the stylus before running the cycle.

0500 Calibration program

G124K1.T2.H3. Calibration of two adjacent stylus faces.

M30 End program.


Manual Tool Setting -- Macro O9011

NOTE: The procedure for Tool Setting is the same as for Calibration, ex-cept that you do NOT enter Kk input.

Description

The Probe must first be ’jogged’ to its down position using the TSA downpush button.

The tool must be selected in MDI mode and positioned in JOG orHANDWHEEL mode to a suitable start position. The cycle will move themaster tool from a start position to the stylus faces as specified by the ToolNose Vector Hh and retract back to the start position. The Tool Offset valueswill be found and stored in the Tool Offset registers.

Application

a) The Tool Probe stylus faces must be calibrated before setting tools.

b) It is NOT necessary to enter approximate tool offset values, unlessusing the Auto Cycle O9012.

c) The tool and offset should be selected using MDI mode, so that thescreen information about the current tool is updated.

d) Enter the optional inputs as listed below in Inputs.

Alternative: The cycle can be run without any inputs provided theTool/Offset is selected in MDI mode, and the Tool Nose Vector number isentered on the Tool Offset page under the ’T’ address.

NOTE: Entering the input data on the cycle call line will override any oth-er default conditions.

e) Position the tool at a suitable start point in JOG or HANDWHEELmode within the Bb box distance.

f) Run the G124 cycle.

Format

[ ] denote optional parameters.

G124 [Bb Cc Hh Tt Mm Xx Zz Uu Ww]Alternative:G65 P9011 [Bb Cc Hh Tt Mm Xx Zz Uu Ww]

Example: G124B10.C10.H3.T2.M.1X100.Z70.U3.W3

Macro Parameters

Bb Cc Hh Tt Mm Xx Zz Uu Ww

Outputs

Set a Tool

The Tool Offset register will be set. On machines with both geometry/wearregisters, the wear compensations will be zeroed (o) and the geometryregisters will be updated.


Broken Tool Check

When the Mm input for broken tool check is used, an alarm is generated andthe machine will stop if the tool is out of tolerance.

Example: Set a Turn Tool

When the following program is run, the X and Z tool offset registers are setfor tool 1.

NOTE: Position the tool within the box distance from each face of the sty-lus before running the cycle.

0501

G124T1.H3. Set the Turn Tool 1

M30 End program.

Example: Set a Cutter to Centre Line

When the following program is run, the side of the cutter will touch thestylus and because of the Cc input used, the tool will be set to centre lineinstead of the edge of the tool. This will be useful for drills etc. where thecentre line position is required.

NOTE: Position the tool within the box distance from the face of thestylusbefore running the cycle.

0502

G124T3.H8.C10. Set tool 3 to centre line

M30 End program.

Example: Set a Cutter Length

When the following program is run, the end cutter face will touch the stylusand set the Z length.

NOTE: Position the tool within the box distance from the face of thestylusbefore running the cycle.

0503

G124T3.H7. Set tool 3 for Z length

M30 End program.

Set a Turn Tool

H3

Set a Cutter to Centre Line

Set a Cutter for Length


Example: Set a Boring Tool

When the following program is run, the X and Z tool offset registers are setfor tool 2.

NOTE: Position the tool within the box distance from each face of the sty-lus before running the cycle.

0504

G124T4.H1. Set the Boring Tool 4

M30 End program.

Example: Broken Tool Check

When the following program is run, the X and Z tool offset registers of tool2 is checked for a broken tool condition.

The TSA is ’jogged’ down manually.

0505..Complete the machining sequence with the current tool.(BROKEN TOOL CHECK)G28U0W0 Return tool to homeG10P0X--12.1Z--160.2 Set program to X+, Z+ corner of the stylusG0X6.Z3. Move to start positionG98 Feed per minuteG124T5.H3.M.1 Broken tools check. A ’BROKEN TOOL’

alarm will result if the tool is out oftolerance

G28U0W0 Return tool to home.Continue with next tool.

NOTE: See the optional Auto cycle macro O9012 for a simpler program-ming method.

Set a Boring Tool

H1

Broken Tool Check

H3


Example: Calibration and Tool Setting

Cautions: When using either vector H1., H5., or H6., the tool mustfirst be moved clear of the cube before returning home.

Prior to setting tools, approximate tool offset values mustbe entered in the tool offset registers.

O506(CALIBRATION/TOOL SETTING)G28U0W0G10P0X--12.1Z--160.2 Set program to X+, Z+ corner of the stylus(OPTIONAL CALIBRATION)/T0303(MASTER TOOL)/G0X6./Z3./G124H3.K1. Calibrate probe/G28U0W0/M00(TOOL SETTING)T0101(20MM DRILL)G0X--10.Z3.G98 Feed per minuteG124H7. Set drill length in ZG0X26.Z--15.G124H8.C20. Set drill to centre lineG28U0W0T0303(TURN TOOL)G0X6.Z3.G124H3. Set turn tool in X ZG28U0W0T0414(GROOVING TOOL T4 OFFSET 14)G0Z--13. 10mm stylusX6.G124H4. Set tool in X ZG28U0W0M30

NOTE: See the Auto Cycle macro O9012 for a simplified programmingmethod.


Auto Tool Setting -- Macro O9012 -- TSA Only

Caution: It is necessary to have calibrated the probe stylus, and en-ter nominal data in the Tool Offset register before runningthis cycle.

Description

This macro is an optionally installed macro to supplement the O9011 macro.The cycle will automatically move the tool to the stylus start point wherethe O9011 macro is called. The cycle then returns to the original start point.

Application

Load nominal tool data into the Tool Offset registers before running thecycle. Program the Tool Setting Arm down (M45 M--code) and select thetool. The cycle will then measure the tool in either or both the X, Zdirections depending on the vector used. Program the Tool Setting Arm Up(M44 M--Code).

Format

[ ] denote optional parameters

G125 [Bb Cc Hh Kk Tt Mm Xx Zz Rr Uu Ww]Alternative:G65 P9012 [Bb Cc Hh Kk Tt Mm Xx Zz Rr Uu Ww]

Example:G125B10.C10.H3.K1.T2.M.1X100.Z70.R30.U3.W3.

Macro Parameters

Caution: The H5 vector is for turning type tools ONLY because theapproach path is around the X+ side of the stylus.

Bb Cc Hh Kk Tt Mm Xx Zz Rr Uu Ww


Example: Showing Simplified Programming Format

The Hh and Tt inputs are used in this example, but they are optional anddefault conditions could be used.

O0050(TOOL SETTING)(*) Optional loading of tool data(LOAD T1 DATA)G10P10001X76.Z85.Q2G10P1X0Z0(LOAD T3 DATA)G10P10003X95.Z38.Q8G10P3X0Z0(*) End of tool data loadingG28U0G28W0M45 Tool setting arm down (active)(*)

T0101(REAR BORE TOOL H1)G98 Feed per minuteG125T1.H1W1.

T0202 (BORE TOOL H2)G125T2.H2U2.W1

T0303 (TURN TOOL H3)G125T3H3

T0404 (REAR TURN TOOL H4)G125T4H4U--2.

T0505(REAR TURN TOOL H5)G125T5.H5

T0606 (GROOVE BORE H6)G125T6.H6

T0707 (S/DRILL H7)G125T7.H7

T0707(S/DRILL X C/LINE H8)G125T7.H8C10.

M44 Tool setting arm up (stowed)M30


Example: Broken Tool Check

When the following program is run, the X and Z Tool Offset registers of tool2 is checked for a broken tool condition.

0505..Complete the machining sequence with the current tool.(BROKEN TOOL CHECK)G28U0W0 Return tool to homeM45 Tool Setting Arm Down (Active)G98 Feed per minuteG125T5.H3.M.1 Broken tools check. A ’BROKEN TOOL’

alarm will result if the tool is out oftolerance

G28U0W0 Return tool to homeM44 Tool Setting Arm Up (Stowed).Continue with next tool.

Broken Tool Check

H3


Chapter 12Parts Catcher

Introduction

This chapter describes the use of the parts catcher. The parts catcher is anoptional device fitted to the operator door to catch parts cut off from barstock. The option is normally fitted to machines equipped with a Barfeeder.

Fig. 61Parts Catcher fitted to Operator Door

Catcher Open

Operator Door

AccessDoor

Operation

The Parts Catcher is advanced and retracted in two ways:--

1. M34/M35 M--codes

2. Operator panel membrane keys

M34 Parts Catcher Advance

M34 moves the parts catcher forward to the collect position. Operator doormust be closed and tool setting arm, if fitted, must be parked.

M35 Parts Catcher Retract

M35 retracts the parts catcher. Operator door must be closed and tool settingarm, if fitted, must be parked.


Parts Catcher Advance Push Button

This push button is used to jog the parts catcher down. It is only active whennot in cycle and with the operator door closed.

Parts Catcher Retract Push Button

This push button is used to jog the parts catcher up. It is only active whennot in cycle and with the operator door closed.

Operator and Programming Notes

1. The two push buttons are only active with the operator door closed.

2. If a Tool Setting Arm is fitted it must be parked before the parts catchercan be advanced.

3. Both M--codes are used in the M61 barfeed macro automatically. Seechapter 13 for a description of the barfeed macro to catch an ejectedbillet.

Programming Example

N350 T1010 Parting off tool selectedN360 G97 S1500 M3 Direct RPM selected -- Spindle startedN370 G95 F0.06 Feed per rev selectedN380 G0 X30 Z--5.1 Move to positionN390 G1 X8 M8 Feed with coolant ONN400 M34 Parts Catcher AdvancedN410 G1 X0 Feed to X0 -- Material Parted offN420 M35 Parts Catcher RetractedN430 G0 X30 Rapid clear in X axisN450 G0 X120 Z150 Rapid X and Z axes to a safe position


Chapter 13Barfeeder

Introduction

This chapter describes the use of the barfeeder. The barfeeder is an optionaldevice fitted to the Hawk range of lathes. As standard 3 different types ofbarfeed are fitted to Hawk lathes:--

1. Hydrafeed -- Hydraulic operated unit2. Feedmaster -- Pneumatic operated unit3. Multifeed -- Hydraulic operated multiple bar unit

Each of the above units is supplied with an operating manual, which shouldbe used in conjunction with this chapter.

Bar Preparation

The outboard end of the bar stock should be chamfered at an angle to matchthe pusher head. Typical pusher heads have a 30 degree angle.

When hollow bar stock is being machined with a hydro--dynamic type barfeed unit, plug the outboard end of the tube to prevent hydraulic oil from thebar feed unit from flowing through the tube and mixing with the cutting fluidin the machine.

M--Codes

The following M--codes are used with the bar feed units:

M90 -- Bar Feed mode on.-- MDI program only.

M91 -- Bar Feed mode off.-- MDI program only.

M92 Rotate Spindle CW-- Reduces Spindle Rotation Speed to a “jog” value set by Keep Relays.-- See Barfeed Spindle Rotation Bits for spindle speed.

M93 -- Rotate Spindle CW OFF.-- Spindle will stop.

M78 -- Open jaws.-- Collet Open signal set on to barfeed unit when chuck is open.

M79 -- Close jaws.-- Collet Open signal set off when chuck is closed.

M86 -- Bar Feed Pressure on.-- Hydrafeed and Feedmaster only.-- Program at start of program.

M87 -- Bar Feed Pressure off.-- Hydrafeed and Feedmaster only.-- To be programmed carefully -- see WARNING.

30) O--RING

PLUG

HOLLOW STOCK BAR

30

WARNING

DO NOT Program an M87M--code when the lathe isin cycle with a part in thechuck/barfeed. This willdamage the barfeederunit as the bar will not beheld central and will vi-brate violently.


M61 -- Used on Multifeed units only.-- Calls Macro O9020 (Multifeed Reload Macro).-- Macro detects end of bar and reloads a new bar.-- Optional parameter Zzzz.zzz -- Z Axis Backoff. If no Zzzz.zzz

value is programmed then a 150mm backoff is performed to ejectbillet.

M80 -- NOT TO BE PROGRAMMED -- Used in Macro O9020-- Eject Bars end (billet) and reloads new bar.

Standard Barfeed Sequence for Multifeed Unit:--

Barfeed into AUTO mode. (Refer to Barfeed Operating Manual)

S Program M90 in MDI mode -- this puts machine in Barfeed ModeS Load part program into memoryS Cycle start on the program

The part program consists of the following:

1. “

2. “ -- machine component

3. “

4. Part--off component.

5. M92 -- Reduce spindle speed to jog rate -- only program if required.

6. Index turret to Bar stop.

7. Position X and Z axes to within 10mm off the end of Bar.

8. Program M61 Zzzz.zzz -- Check end of bar -- reload new bar ifnecessary.

9. Program M78 -- Chuck open.

10. Z axis move -- Z move = length of bar.

11. M79 -- Chuck close.

12. Move turret clear.

13. M93 -- “Turn off” spindle jog rate -- only program if required.

14. “

15. “ -- machine component (centre drill and advance tailstockif necessary).

16. “

17. “

S M91 in MDI mode, if necessary to take the lathe out of Barfeed mode.


M61 -- Macro Code (shown for information purposes only)

O9020 (Multifeed Reload Macro) -- Prog. No.M69 -- Retract Tailstock#100=#1000 -- Let #100 = user input value 1 or 0IF[#1000 EQ 0]GOTO 99 -- Goto N99IF[#26 NE #0] GOTO 1#26=150N1#101=#26G00W#101 -- Incremental Z move outM34 -- Parts catcher outM78 -- Chuck openM80 -- Eject billetM35 -- Parts catcher inG00W--#26 -- Incremental Z move inM80 -- Reload new barG4X2.0 -- Dwell 2 secondsM79 -- Chuck closeN99 M99 -- End of macro

Program M61 -- 150mm +ve incremental Z move.

Program M61 Z250 -- 250mm +ve incremental Z move.

Standard Barfeed Sequence for Hydrafeed and Feedmaster

Barfeed into AUTO mode. (Refer to Barfeed Operating Manual)

S Program M90 in MDI mode -- this puts machine in Barfeed ModeS Load part program into memoryS Cycle start on the program

The part program consists of the following:

1. M86 -- Barfeed pressure ON.

2. “ -- Machine component.

3. “

4. “

5. Part--off component.

6. Index turret to Bar stop.

7. Program X and Z axes to within 10mm off the end of Bar.

8. M78 -- Chuck open.

9. Z axis move -- Z move = length of bar.

10. M79 -- Chuck close.

11. Move turret clear.

12. “

13. “

14. “ -- Machine component.


Barfeed Spindle Rotation Speed Bits -- Keep Relay K Bits

K6.0 SJ_B0 SPINDLE JOG BIT 0 -- BARFEEDK6.1 SJ_B1 SPINDLE JOG BIT 1 -- BARFEEDK6.2 SJ_B2 SPINDLE JOG BIT 2 -- BARFEEDK6.3 SJ_B3 SPINDLE JOG BIT 3 -- BARFEEDK6.4 SJ_B4 SPINDLE JOG BIT 4 -- BARFEEDK6.5 SJ_B5 SPINDLE JOG BIT 5 -- BARFEEDK6.6 SJ_B6 SPINDLE JOG BIT 6 -- BARFEEDK6.7 SJ_B7 SPINDLE JOG BIT 7 -- BARFEED

K6.0 set RPM = 2K6.0, K6.1 set RPM = 5K6.0, K6.1, K6.2 set RPM = 11K6.0, K6.1, K6.2, K6.3 set RPM = 22K6.0, K6.1, K6.2, K6.3, K6.4 set RPM = 45K6.0, K6.1, K6.2, K6.3, K6.4, K6.5 set RPM = 92K6.0, K6.1, K6.2, K6.3, K6.4, K6.5, K6.6 set RPM = 186K6.0, K6.1, K6.2, K6.3, K6.4, K6.5, K6.6, K6.7 set RPM = 370


Chapter 14Reserved Macro Routines

The following macro subroutine numbers are reserved for specific machinefunctions.

9020 Barfeed macro--detect end of bar/reload new bar -- Multifeed only.

9011 Renishaw Tool Setting Arm (TSA) Semi Manual Tool Setting macro.

9012 Renishaw Tool Setting Arm (TSA) Auto Tool Setting macro

These macros should not be edited or deleted. All other macro subroutinenumbers are available for customer usage.

NOTE: If any macros are accidently erased or edited then the floppy diskcopy as supplied with the machine should be reloaded. Refer tosection on reloading machine software.

Used Macro Variables

Volatile common variables#100, #101 used by barfeed macro

Non volatile common variables#509 used by Renishaw TSA macros

#522

#503

#524

#525

#526

#527

#530

#531


Chapter 15Connection to Data Input/Output Devices

Connection to Data Input and Output Devices

CINCINNATI TURNING CENTRES are supplied with a common inputand output RS232 serial data port located on the front face of control stationhousing. The port can be used to interface any RS232 serial data inputoutput device such as a data printer or remote computer.

Use the following information to prepare the interface:

1. Connector type:-- 25 pin D type plug (female socket is mounted onmachine).

2. Connector pin out details:

Pin No FanucSignalNotation

CommonSignalNotation

SignalFunction

InputSignalto CNC

OutputSignalfrom CNC

1 FG FG FRAME GROUND

2 SD TD TRANSMITTED DATA "

3 RD RD RECEIVED DATA A

4 RS RTS REQUEST TO SEND "

5 CS CTS CLEAR TO SEND A

6 DR DSR DATA SET READY A

7 SG SG SIGNAL GROUND

8* CD DCD DATA CARRIER DETECT A

20 ER DTR DATA TERMINAL READY "

NOTES: * Always link DCD to DTR on device plug.

3. Input/Output Device Parameters

I/O Channelselection viaParameter 0020

No of Stop Bitsselectable 1 or 2

Blankfeedbefore and afterthe Data at DataOutput selectable

Input/OutputDevice Code

Coded Baudrate(bps) of Input/Output Device --selectable

Channel 0(Parameter --2202 = 0)

P 101.0 P 101.7 P 102 P 103

Channel 1(Parameter --0020 = 1)

P 111.0 P 111.7 P 112 P 113

ParameterSettings

0=(1 stop bit)1=(2 stop bits)

0=(Output)1=(Not Output)

Selectable 0--6eg:0=(RS--232--C)See I/O Devicecode table inthis chapter.

1=50 7=6002=100 8=12003=110 9=24004=150 10=48005=200 11=96006=300 12=19200

For further information refer to GE Fanuc Operator manual.III Operation, chapter 2.4


Input/Output Device and Code Number

Code Number Input/Output Device

0 RS--232--C (Used control codes DC1 to DC4)

1 FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 1 (FANUC CASSETTE B1/B2)

2 FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 3 (FANUC CASSETTE F1)

3 FANUC PROGRAM FILE Mate, FANUC FA Card AdaptorFANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTOR, FANUC Handy FileFANUC SYSTEM P--MODEL H

4 RS--232--C (Used control codes DC1 to DC4)

5 Portable tape reader

6 FANUC PPRFANUC SYSTEM P--MODEL G, FANUC SYSTEM P--MODEL H

For further information refer to the GE Fanuc operator manual.

4. Selection of Input/Output device via parameter 0020

In MDI or Emergency stop state, select OFFSET/SETTING key onMDI keypad followed by [SETTING] softkey, set PARAMETERWRITE = 1 and set I/O channel to the required channel number (ie: 0,1 or 4), then reset PARAMETER WRITE = 0.

I/O Channel 4 (Memory Card)

CINCINNATI VERTICAL MACHINING CENTRES are suppliedwith a PCMCIA MEMORY CARD SLOT which is located on the frontface of the control station, and enabled when the I/O CHANNEL(Parameter 20) is set to 4.

For further information on using the PCMCIA MEMORY CARDSLOT for data input/output refer to GE Fanuc Operator manual: IIIOperation, chapter 8.11.


Chapter 16Diagnostics

DANGER

HIGH VOLTAGELethal voltages are present in the magnetics and electricalcontrol cabinets when the MACHINE MAIN DISCONNECTis ’ON’. Current and voltage measurements should be at-tempted only by qualified electrical maintenance personnel.

Before working on any electrical circuits, turn the machineMain Disconnect Device ’OFF’ and lock It.

Capacitors in the Servo Drives require up to 20 minutes tocompletely discharge. Always verify that discharge is com-plete using a known working and calibrated voltmeter be-fore commencing work on these units.

Unless expressly stated in applicable Cincinnati Machinedocumentation or by the appropriate Cincinnati MachineField Service Representative, do NOT work with electricalpower ’ON’. If such express statement of advice exists,working with electrical power ’ON’ should be performed bya Cincinnati Machine Field Service Representative. Thecustomer and subsequent transferees must determine thatany other person performing work with electrical power ’ON’is trained and technically qualified.

Failure To Follow This Instruction May Result In DeathOr Serious Personal Shock Injury.


PMC Input Address Reference List

PMC SCHEMATIC FUNCTIONADDRESS REF

X0004.0 FT_SW CHUCK JAWS FOOT SWITCHX0004.1 TXT_OK TRANSFORMER TEMPERATURE OKX0004.2 HYDPRS MACHINE HYDRAULIC PRESSUREX0004.3 QLPRES QUILL HYDRAULIC PRESSUREX0004.4 H_FLTB HYDRAULIC FILTER BLOCKEDX0004.5 A_LOW TURRET AIR LOW PRESSURE SWITCHX0004.7 SKIP PROBE SKIP SIGNALX0005.0 ALBIT1 TURRET ALARM BIT 1X0005.1 ALBIT2 TURRET ALARM BIT 2X0005.2 ALBIT4 TURRET ALARM BIT 4X0005.3 T_LOCK TURRET LOCKEDX0005.4 T_INDX TURRET INDEXEDX0005.5 T_CRSH TURRET CRASH SWITCHX0005.6 DR_CLD OPERATOR DOOR CLOSEDX0005.7 DR_LKD OPERATOR DOOR CLOSED & LOCKEDX0006.0 CM_OL COOLANT MOTOR OVERLOADX0006.1 HM_OL HYDRAULIC MOTOR OVERLOADX0006.2 CON_OL SWARF CONVEYOR MOTOR OVERLOADX0006.3 CC_ADV CHUCK CYLINDER ADVANCEDX0006.4 CC_RET CHUCK CYLINDER RETRACTEDX0006.5 X_REF X AXIS REFERENCE SWITCHX0006.6 Z_REF Z AXIS REFERENCE SWITCHX0006.7 C_REF C AXIS ALIGN SWITCHX0007.0 PR_PCA PROXIMITY SWITCH PARTS CATCHER ADVANCEDX0007.1 PR_PCR PROXIMITY SWITCH PARTS CATCHER RETRACTEDX0007.2 EO_BAR BARFEED_END OF BAR SIGNALX0007.3 BF_RDY BARFEED READY SIGNAL--MULTIFEED.

AUTO DETECT SIGNAL HYDRAFEED ANDFEEDMASTER

X0007.4 BFMFIN BAR FEED M--CODE FINISH SIGNALX0007.5 BF_ALM BAR FEED ALARMX0007.6 P_EOB BARFEED PRE END OF BAR SIGNALX0008.0 M70_FB M70 FEEDBACK SIGNALX0008.1 M71_FB M71 FEEDBACK SIGNALX0008.2 M72_FB M72 FEEDBACK SIGNALX0008.3 M73_FB M73 FEEDBACK SIGNALX0008.4 *ESPPB EMERGENCY STOPX0008.5 P_ACT RENISHAW TSA ACTIVE (DOWN)X0008.6 P_STOW RENISHAW TSA STOWED (UP)X0009.1 DT_1SW DRIVEN TOOL ONCE PER POSITION SWITCHX0009.2 CB_PS C AXIS BRAKE PRESSURE SWITCHX0009.5 LEV_LK HPA LEVER LOCKED SWITCHX0009.6 COV_P HPA COVER FITTED SWITCHX0021.0 *OV1 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 1X0021.1 *OV2 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 2X0021.2 *OV4 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 4X0021.3 *OV8 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 8X0021.7 KEY_SW PART PROGRAM PROTECTION KEYX0023.0 MSTRPB PUSHBUTTON -- MASTER STARTX0023.1 CYSRPB REMOTE CYCLE START PUSHBUTTONX0023.2 PB_JO PUSHBUTTON CHUCK JAWS OPENX0023.3 PB_JC PUHSBUTTON CHUCK JAWS CLOSEX0023.4 PBQADV PUSHBUTTON QUILL ADVANCEX0023.5 PBQRET PUSHBUTTON QUILL RETRACT


PMC Output Address Reference List

PMC SCHEMATIC FUNCTIONADDRESS REF

Y0004.0 D_UNLK OPERATOR DOOR SHOTBOLT UNLOCKY0004.1 HYD_M HYDRAULIC MOTOR CONTACTORY0004.2 CLT_ON COOLANT PUMP CONTACTORY0004.3 X_BRK X AXIS BRAKEY0004.4 SL_JC SOLENOID CHUCK JAWS CLOSEY0004.5 SL_JO SOLENOID CHUCK JAWS OPENY0004.6 SL_Q_F SOLENOID QUILL FORWARDY0004.7 SL_Q_R SOLENOID QUILL REVERSEY0005.0 GREEN MACHINE STATUS BEACON GREENY0005.1 AMBER MACHINE STATUS BEACON AMBERY0005.2 RED MACHINE STATUS BEACON REDY0005.3 P_MV RENISHAW TSA MOVE SIGNALY0005.4 P_DIR RENISHAW TSA DIRECTION SIGNALY0005.6 CONFWD SWARF CONVEYOR FORWARDY0006.0 PBIT01 TURRET POSITION BIT 01Y0006.1 PBIT02 TURRET POSITION BIT 02Y0006.2 PBIT04 TURRET POSITION BIT 04Y0006.3 PBIT08 TURRET POSITION BIT 08Y0006.4 PARITY TURRET PARITY BITY0006.5 PSTART TURRET START SIGNALY0006.6 PTAB01 NO. TURRET TOOLS 1=12, 0=8Y0006.7 PTAB02 TURRET INERTIA 0=LOW/1=HIGHY0007.0 MODE01 TURRET MODE BIT1Y0007.1 MODE02 TURRET MODE BIT2Y0007.2 MODE03 TURRET MODE BIT3Y0007.7 M02_OP M2/M30 OUTPUTY0008.0 M70_OP M70 OUTPUTY0008.1 M71_OP M71 OUTPUTY0008.2 M72_OP M72 OUTPUTY0008.3 M73_OP M73 OUTPUTY0008.4 BF_ENB BAR FEED ENABLEY0008.5 BF_MCD BAR FEED M CODEY0008.6 C_OPEN COLLET OPEN -- BARFEEDY0008.7 SL_APC SOLENOID ADVANCE PARTS CATCHERY0009.0 SR_1 STEADY REST 1 OUTPUTY0009.1 SR_2 STEADY REST 2 OUTPUTY0009.2 BSOL_1 C AXIS BRAKE SOLENOID 1Y0009.3 BSOL_2 C AXIS BRAKE SOLENOID 2Y0009.4 BSOL_3 C AXIS BRAKE SOLENOID 3


FANUC Operators Panel Connection Signals

The DI/DO signals at the following addresses (PMC) are used exclusivelyfor the operator’s panel.

PMC address

bit 0bit 1bit 2bit 3bit 4bit 5bit 6bit 7

*ESPPB

KD0KD1KD2KD3KD4KD5KD6

*OV1*OV2*OV4*OV8

KA0KA1KA2KA3

KD7

KEY

KST

X20

X21

X22

Y20

X8

LD0LD1LD2LD3LD4LD5LD6LD7

*ESP X8.4 Emergency Stop Pushbutton

KEY (X21.7) Memory Protect Signal

When Key = 1 Program storage and editing operations etc. can beperformed.

*OV1--*OV8 (X21.0 0-- 21.3) Override Selector Switch Signals

The override codes are input according to the table below.

Rotary switch position *OV8X21.3

*OV4X21.2

*OV2X21.1

*OV1X21.0

0%10%20%30%40%

----

150%

11111----0

11110----0

11001----0

10101----0

(Binary code reverse signal)

KD0 -- KD7 (X20.0) -- 20.7)KA0 -- KA3 (X22.0 -- 22.3), KST (X22.7)LDO -- LD7 (Y20.0 -- 20.7)

These signals are processed directly by the controls management softwareas coded signals for the key switches and the LEDs. Therefore, they haveno meaningful function to a maintenance engineer.


FANUC Operator Station

Self--Diagnostic Function

Status Display LED

The operators panel PCB (located on the reverse side of the operator’s panel)is equipped with a green status display LED. It indicates the followingstatus:

Flashing about every second: NormalOn (Not flashing): Test modeOther than above: Fault

Test Mode

The operators panel assumes the test mode if the control is turned on whiledepressing ’AUTO’ and ’SINGLE BLOCK’ keys at the same time.

As soon as the test mode is active, all LEDs should flash seven timessimultaneously, if any of the keys are depressed thereafter, the LEDcorresponding should illuminate.

In the test mode, the depressed key is not transferred to the PMC nor is itpossible to light the LED from the PMC. To finish the test mode, depress’AUTO’ and ’DRY RUN’ at the same time.


Fig. 62Operators Control Panel

A

U

X

1--

X

+

X+--

x

1X

Z+X

--Z +Z

--X

X1 X10 X100

AUX1

-- +RS 232

A

B

C

D

E

F

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

100%

FANUC Operator Station Key/LED -- Diagnostic Address Table

PCM--ADDRESS

BIT7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

R292/R242 F3PROGRAM

STOP

F2CYCLESTOP

F1CYCLESTART

E1 D1PGM

RESTART

C1DRYRUN

B1SINGLEBLOCK

A1

AUTO

R293/R243 F4SPINDLE

CW

E4 E3 E2 D2TSA

DOWN

C2PROGRAM

TEST

B2BLOCKDELETE

A2

EDIT

R294/R244 D4SPINDLE

DEC

D3TSAUP

C4TURRET

JOG +

C3AXIS

INHIBIT

B4MPGX1

B3OPTIONAL

STOP

A4ALIGN

(HOME)

A3

MDI

R295/R245 E7 F6SPINDLE

CCW

F5SPINDLE

STOP

E5 D5SPINDLE

100%

C5TURRET

JOG --

B5MPGX10

A5

JOG

R296/R246 F8COOLANT

ON

E8 E7 E6 D6SPINDLE

INC

C6AUX

1

B6MPGX100

A6PARTS

CATCHERDOWN

R297/R247 D8 D7 C8

--Z

C7 B8 B7 A8ID

GRIP

A7PARTS

CATCHER-UP

R298/R248 F9COOLANT

OFF

E9 D9

--X

C9RAPID

TRAVERSE

B9

+X

A9OD

GRIP

R299/R249 F10COOLANT

AUTO

E10 D10 C10

+Z

B10 A10OFFSET

MEASURE

S Top row in table Coordinates. . . . . . . . . . . . .S Bottom row in table Name of key. . . . . . . . . .


Alarm Messages

Alarm messages are displayed in response to incorrect or missing feedbacksignals from the machine and certain part programming errors.

This section describes the meaning of each alarm, the probable reasons fortheir occurrence and the recommended alarm recovery procedure in eachcase.

All alarms cause the control to enter the alarm status and may invoke variousmachine reactions depending upon the severity of the alarm. It is necessaryto depress RESET to cancel an alarm once the fault causing the alarm hasbeen removed. If the fault is still present then the alarm message remainsdisplayed.

When the reason for a persistent alarm cannot be determined after followingthe alarm recovery procedures then contact Cincinnati Machine Servicedepartment for further advice.

Alarm Number Alarm Message

1000 KEEP RELAYS NOT SET1001 EMERGENCY STOP1002 SPINDLE DRIVE ALARM1003 DRIVEN TOOL ORIENT TIMEOUT1004 SP2 SPINDLE DRIVE ALARM1005 SPINDLE ORIENTATION TIMEOUT1006 SPINDLE ACC/DEC TIMEOUT1007 SPINDLE DEC TO ZERO TIME1008 COOLANT MOTOR OVERLOAD1009 OPERATOR DOOR OPEN1010 BATTERY LOW KEEP POWER ON1011 NO T WORD PROGRAMMED -- M76/M771012 POWER DOWN CONTROL1013 OPERATOR PANEL I/O ERR1014 REMOTE I/O MODULE ERR1015 DRIVEN TOOL SPINDLE ACC/DEC TIMOUT1016 HYDRAULIC FILTER BLOCKED1017 MACHINE HYDRAULIC PRESS FAIL1018 QUILL PRESSURE FAILURE1019 TRANSFORMER OVERTEMP1020 CONVEYOR MOTOR OVERLOAD1021 HYDRAULIC MOTOR OVERLOAD1022 TURRET OVERLOAD10231024 TURRET SYSTEM ERROR1025 TURRET CONNECTION ERROR1026 TURRET UTILISATION ERROR1027 TURRET UNLOCKING ERROR1028 TURRET LOCKING ERROR1029 TURRET REFERENCE ERROR1030 TURRET INTERFACE ERROR1031 TURRET CRASH SWITCH ERROR1032 CHUCK IN UNGRIPPED CONDITION


1033 INITIALISE ID/OD GRIP1034 TURRET AIR PRESSURE LOW1035 INITIALISE CHUCK JAWS1036 T WORD RANGE ERROR1037 INITIALISE TAILSTOCK QUILL103810391040 PARTS CATCHER ADVANCED TIMEOUT1041 PARTS CATCHER RETRACTED TIMEOUT1042 PARTS CATCHER NOT RETRACTED1043 TOOL SETTING ARM NOT PARKED1044 TOOL SETTING ARM ADVANCE TIMEOUT1045 TOOL SETTING ARM RETRACT TIMEOUT10461047 NOT IN MDI MODE1048 BAR FEED ALARM1049 BAR FEED NOT IN AUTO MODE1050 PROBE OPEN1051 PROBE FAIL1052 ILLEGAL TOOL OFFSET NUMBER T1053 ILLEGAL TOOL NOSE VECTOR H1054 INPUTS C AND H1--H4 MIXED1055 BROKEN TOOL1056 MINIMUM TAPPING SPEED 60RPM1057 M44/M45 INHIBIT -- CHUCK ROTATING1058 SPINDLE CONTOUR MODE (C AXIS) TIMEOUT1059 DRIVEN TOOL SPINDLE DEC TO ZERO TIMEOUT1060 SP1 OR SP2 NOT STATIONARY1061 M78/M79 INHIBIT -- CHUCK ROTATING1063 TURRET ALIGN FAILURE1064 TURRET POSITIONING FAILURE1065 OPEN / CLOSE OPERATOR DOOR1066 SERVO AXIS ABNORMAL LOAD DETECTION1067 HPA PROTECTIVE COVER NOT FITTED1068 HPA LEVER NOT IN LOCKED


ALARM NUMBER 1000

ALARM MESSAGE: KEEP RELAYS NOT SET

MEANING OF ALARM: The keep relay data has not been completed.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. The memory retention system of the control systemhas failed.

2. The control memory has been cleared.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: N/A

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: Keep relay data set to Machine Dependant Parametersheet as supplied with machine.

ALLOWABLE TIME: Instant

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold and Spindle StopThis alarm is unlikely to be seen at any other time than atcontrol power on.

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: Set keep relay data to the values as defined on the MachineDependant Parameter.


ALARM NUMBER 1001

ALARM MESSAGE: EMERGENCY STOP

MEANING OF ALARM: Emergency Stop push button is depressed.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: Emergency Stop push button has not been released. TheEmergency Stop push button latches down when de-pressed and has to be turned clockwise to unlatch.


CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: Input X8.4 HIGH


CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Control enters EMG ALM status. Depressing EmergencyStop push button also initiates a hardware shut down ofaxes and spindle drives, and hydraulic unit.

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Release Emergency Stop push button.2. Depress RESET.3. Realign machine axes and turret mechanism.


ALARM NUMBER 1002

ALARM MESSAGE: SPINDLE DRIVE ALARM

MEANING OF ALARM: A signal was received from the spindle drive unit indicatingthat a spindle drive fault was active.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: See ALARM RECOVER PROCEDURE below.


CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: F45.0 is LOW when no fault present.


CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold and spindle stop.

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Power down machine and turn the main disconnectswitch off.

2. After a few seconds turn the main disconnect switchback on.

3. Restart the machine.4. If the spindle drive is still in a fault condition power down

the machine, open the drives cabinet and check thegeneral condition of wiring to and from the spindle driveand make sure all connections are secure.

5. To properly further diagnose any spindle drive fault it willbe necessary to obtain advice/assistance from Cincin-nati Machine Service Department.


ALARM NUMBER 1003

ALARM MESSAGE: DRIVEN TOOL ORIENT TIMEOUT

MEANING OF ALARM: A request was made to orientate the Driven Tool spindle butthe orientation complete was not recieved within the allo-cated time.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Faulty wiring to spindle encoder.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: G74.6 HIGH

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: F49.7 HIGH

ALLOWABLE TIME: 6 seconds


ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Depress RESET.2. If necessary jog the turret into a safe position.3. Attempt to orienate driven tool spindle using M19code.4. If alarm still persists power down machine and turn off

main disconnect switch5. Open electrical cabinate door and check general condi-

tion of machine wiring to and from the spindle motor an-coder mounted in the back of the driven tool spindle mo-tor.


ALARM NUMBER 1004

ALARM MESSAGE: SP2 SPINDLE DRIVE ALARM

MEANING OF ALARM: A signal was received from the Driven Tool spindle driveunit (sp2) indicating that a spindle drive fault was active.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: See ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE below


CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: F49.0 LOW when no fault present

ALLOWABLE TIME: Insant


ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Power down the machine and turn the main disconnectswitch off.

2. After a few seconds turn the main disconnect switchback on.

3. Restart the machine.4. If the spindle drive is still in a fault condition, power

down the machine, open the electrical cabinet andcheck the general condition of wiring to and from thespindle drive and make sure all connections are secure.



ALARM NUMBER 1005

ALARM MESSAGE: SPINDLE ORIENTATION TIME OUT

MEANING OF ALARM: A request was made to orientate the spindle but the orien-tation complete signal was not received within the allocatedtime.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Faulty wiring to spindle encoder.





ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Depress RESET.2. If necessary jog the machine spindle back into the nor-

mal operating range.3. Attempt to orientate spindle using M19 code.4. If alarm still persists power down machine and turn off

main disconnect switch.5. Open electrical cabinet door and check general condi-

tion of machine wiring to and from the spindle motor en-coder mounted in the back of the spindle motor.

6. Close electrical cabinet door and power up machine.


ALARM NUMBER 1006

ALARM MESSAGE: SPINDLE ACC/DEC TIME OUT

MEANING OF ALARM: An attempt was made to start the machine spindle orchange the current spindle speed, but the spindle motor upto speed signal was not received within the prescribed time.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Faulty wiring.2. Faulty spindle drive unit.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: For CW rotation:-- G70.5 ON, G70.4 OFFFor CCW rotation: G70.4 ON, G70.5 OFF




ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Depress RESET to cancel alarm.2. Retry starting the spindle using M03/4 and S code in

MDI.3 If alarm still persists power down machine and turn off


tion of machine wiring to and from the spindle drive unitand make sure all connections are secure.

5. Close electrical cabinet door and power up machine.


ALARM NUMBER 1007

ALARM MESSAGE: SPINDLE DEC TO ZERO TIME

MEANING OF ALARM: A spindle stop request was issued to the spindle drive butthe spindle zero speed input was not received within theprescribed time. Can also occur even if spindle is station-ary as spindle zero speed status is assumed when spindleis not in use.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Faulty wiring.2. Faulty spindle drive unit.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: G70.5 and G70.4 LOW




ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Depress RESET to cancel alarm.2. Retry stopping and starting spindle in MDI mode.3. If alarm still persists power down machine and turn off


tion of machine wiring to and from the spindle drive unitand make sure all connections are secure.

5. Close cabinet door and power up machine.


ALARM NUMBER 1008

ALARM MESSAGE: COOLANT MOTOR OVERLOAD

MEANING OF ALARM: The electrical overload unit used to protect the coolantpump motor has tripped out.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. The coolant pump intake mesh is contaminated.2. Faulty coolant motor.3. Faulty overload signal wiring.


CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: X6.0 HIGH


CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold.

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Power down machine and turn main disconnect switchoff.

2. Open electrical door and reset the coolant motor over-load unit.

3. Check if anything is blocking the coolant pump intakemesh.

4. Close electrical cabinet door and power up machine.5. If the coolant overload retrips when the coolant is

turned on it will be necessary to remove the motor andcheck for contaminants beyond the filter mesh and thecondition of the motor windings.


ALARM NUMBER 1009

ALARM MESSAGE: OPERATOR DOOR OPEN

MEANING OF ALARM: The OPERATOR DOOR CLOSED AND LOCKED switchsignal was not received within the prescribed time whenattempting to invoke an activation that required the opera-tor doors to be electrically locked. Alternatively the OPER-ATOR DOOR LOCKED switch signal was lost during themachine cycle or while the spindle was rotating.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Operator door not fully closed restricting the door lock-ing bolt from correctly inserting into the door latch.

2. Faulty opto--isolator output module.3. Operator door opened during cycle or while the spindle

was rotating.4. Faulty wiring.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: Y4.0 LOW

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: X5.6 HIGH and X5.7 HIGH

ALLOWABLE TIME: 0.25 seconds


ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Depress RESET to cancel alarm.2. Open and close operator doors and attempt to restart

the machine cycle.3. If the alarm is reactivated monitor the door switch in the

STATUS display.4. If the switch is not functioning correctly check the condi-

tion of the wiring to and from the switches.5. Check the condition of the relevant door unlock opto--

isolator module.


ALARM NUMBER 1010

ALARM MESSAGE: BATTERY LOW KEEP POWER ON

MEANING OF ALARM: The voltage of the control memory retention batteriesdropped below the minimum permitted level.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Batteries need replacing.2. Faulty wiring from batteries to control unit.


CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: N/A

ALLOWABLE TIME: N/A

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Alarm 1010 will not be reported until the current machinecycle is complete. However the BAT alarm status may bedisplayed while the machine is in cycle. Any attempt to re-start the machine cycle while this alarm is active will be re-jected.

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Refer to battery replacement procedure in GE FanucOperator Manual, IV Maintenance, chapter 1 immedi-ately.

2. If the alarm still persists check the condition of the wiringfrom the battery housing to the control unit.


ALARM NUMBER 1011

ALARM MESSAGE: NO T WORD PROGRAMMED -- M76/M77

MEANING OF ALARM: No T word has been programmed on a block with an M76or M77.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Programming error.





ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Depress RESET to cancel alarm.2. Edit program to include a T word.3. Restart program at a convenient/safe point.


ALARM NUMBER 1012

ALARM MESSAGE: POWER DOWN CONTROL

MEANING OF ALARM: The X--axis has been selected for jog or handwheel beforethe machine is aligned.This alarm is posted to prevent an incorrect alignment onthe X--axis.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: Jogging axes away from chuck/part before alignment.




CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Error posted -- power up inhibited.

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Power down control.2. Power back up control.3. Align machine as normal.


ALARM NUMBER 1013

ALARM MESSAGE: OPERATOR PANEL I/O ERROR

MEANING OF ALARM: A fault has occurred on the operator panel I/O.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Faulty operator panel.


CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: X35 ‡00000000


CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold and spindle stop

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Check wiring to operator panel I/O.2. Replace operator panel.


ALARM NUMBER 1014

ALARM MESSAGE: REMOTE I/O MODULE ERROR

MEANING OF ALARM: A fault has occurred on one of the remote I/O modules.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Faulty I/O module.


CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: X19 ‡00000000



ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Check wiring to remote I/O modules.2. Replace suspect remote I/O module.


ALARM NUMBER 1015

ALARM MESSAGE: DRIVEN TOOL SPINDLE ACC/DEC TIMOUT

MEANING OF ALARM: An attempt was made to start the machine spindle orchange the current spindle speed, but the spindle motor upto speed signal was not received within the specified time.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Faulty wiring.2. Faulty spindle drive (sp2) unit.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: For CW rotation:-- G74.4 HIGH, G74.5 LOWFor CCW rotation:-- G74.4 LOW, G74.5 HIGH


ALLOWABLE TIME: 20 seconds.


ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Depress reset to cancel the alarm.2. Retry starting the spindle using M03/4 and S code in

MDI.3. If alarm persists power down machine and turn off main

disconnect switch.4. Open the electrical cabinet and check the general con-

dition of wiring to and from the spindle drive and makesure all connections are secure.

5. If fault persists it will be necessary to obtain advice/as-sistance from Cincinnati Machine Service Department.


ALARM NUMBER 1016

ALARM MESSAGE: HYDRAULIC FILTER BLOCKED

MEANING OF ALARM: The hydraulic filter is blocked.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Dirty hydraulic filter.


CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: X4.4 LOW


CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Power down control/machine (isolator off).2. Refer to service manual for replacement of hydraulic

filter.


ALARM NUMBER 1017

ALARM MESSAGE: MACHINE HYDRAULIC PRESS FAIL

MEANING OF ALARM: The hydraulic pressure switch has detected a failure.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Low fluid level in hydraulic tank.2. Damaged hydraulic hose.3. Hydraulic pump failure.4. Defective or incorrectly adjusted hydraulic oil pressure

switch.5. Wiring problem.




CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold/hydraulics off (E--Stop condition).

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: Check all of the above reasons for alarm -- correct as nec-essary.Machine power off (isolator off) to check wiring/hydraulicpump.


ALARM NUMBER 1018

ALARM MESSAGE: QUILL PRESSURE FAILURE

MEANING OF ALARM: The quill pressure switch signal was lost with the quill ad-vanced while in cycle.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Defective or incorrectly adjusted quill pressure switch.2. Damaged hydraulic hose.3. Wiring problem.





ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: Check all of the above reasons for alarm -- correct as nec-essary.Machine power off (isolator off) to check wiring/hydraulichoses.


ALARM NUMBER 1019

ALARM MESSAGE: TRANSFORMER OVERTEMP.

MEANING OF ALARM: The main auto transformer is overheating.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Excessive loading of the machine.2. Incorrect supply voltage.3. Faulty transformer thermistor.4. Faulty machine wiring.




CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold, spindle stop at the end of the current NC ma-chine cycle.

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Check that the current NC cycle is not overloading themachine.

2. Check that the incoming supply voltage to the machineis within specification.

3. Let the transformer cool down to see if the alarm can bereset.

4. If the fault is still present when the transformer hascooled down, then check the condition of the wiring andthe function of the transformer thermistor.


ALARM NUMBER 1020

ALARM MESSAGE: CONVEYOR MOTOR OVERLOAD

MEANING OF ALARM: The conveyor motor overload has ’tripped’ due to an over-load condition.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Swarf conveyor jammed with excessive swarf.2. Defective swarf conveyor motor.3. Defective circuit breaker.4. Wiring problem.





ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: Check all of the above reasons for alarm -- correct as nec-essary.Machine power off (isolator off) to check circuit breaker/wir-ing.


ALARM NUMBER 1021

ALARM MESSAGE: HYDRAULIC MOTOR OVERLOAD

MEANING OF ALARM: The hydraulic motor circuit breaker has ’tripped’ due to anoverload condition.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Excessive motor load due to high hydraulic pressure2. Defective hydraulic pump motor.3. Defective circuit breaker.4. Wiring problem.




CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Hydraulics off -- feedhold (E--Stop condition)

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: Check all of the above reasons for alarm -- correct as nec-essary.Machine power off (isolator off) to check circuit breaker/wir-ing/pump--motor combination.


ALARM NUMBER 1022

ALARM MESSAGE: TURRET OVERLOAD

MEANING OF ALARM: The electrical overload unit to protect the turret unit hastripped out.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Faulty overload wiring.2. Faulty turret unit.




CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold and Spindle stop.

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Power down machine and turn main disconnect off .2. Open electrical cabinet door and reset the Turret over-

load unit.3. Close electrical cabinet and power up machine.4. If the overload re--trips when a turret move is requested

-- it will be necessary to check the wiring of the turretunit. -- refer to turret manual supplied with the machine.

5. If fault persists it will be necessary to obtain advice/as-sistance from Cincinnati Machine Service Department.


ALARM NUMBER 1024

ALARM MESSAGE: TURRET SYSTEM ERROR

MEANING OF ALARM: The Turret Unit has issued a system error.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: Faulty supply voltage to turret unit due to:--1. Faulty circuit breaker.2. Faulty supply to circuit breaker.


CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: X5.0, X5.1 and X5.2 all LOW


CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold/spdl stop -- turret alignment is lost.

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: Check the following:--1. Turret circuit breaker operation.2. Check supply to circuit breaker and turret.3. Refer to turret maintenance manual supplied.4. Power down/power back up machine -- if fault persists

contact Cincinnati Machine Field service.


ALARM NUMBER 1025

ALARM MESSAGE: TURRET CONNECTION ERROR

MEANING OF ALARM: The Turret Unit has issued an over voltage alert.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: Faulty supply voltage to turret.





ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: Check the following:--1. Check supply voltage to turret.2. Power down/power back up machine -- if fault persists

contact Cincinnati Machine Field service.


ALARM NUMBER 1026

ALARM MESSAGE: TURRET UTILISATION ERROR

MEANING OF ALARM: The Turret Unit has posted a utilisation error.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Over current.2. Servo error.3. Thermal detector in turret.





ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Refer to turret maintenance supplied.2. Power down machine -- power back up. If fault persists

contact Cincinnati Machine Field Service.


ALARM NUMBER 1027

ALARM MESSAGE: TURRET UNLOCKING ERROR

MEANING OF ALARM: The Turret Unit has posted an unlocking (unclamping) er-ror.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Unlocking (unclamping) Switch fault.2. Unlocking (unclamping) Switch setting.3. Air supply fault.4. Wiring fault.


CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: X5.0, X5.1 and X5.2 all LOWX5.3 LOW



ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Check Air supply to unit -- pressure should be 5 Bar.2. Refer to turret maintenance manual supplied.3. Power down/power back up machine. If fault persists



ALARM NUMBER 1028

ALARM MESSAGE: TURRET LOCKING ERROR

MEANING OF ALARM: The Turret Unit has posted a locking (clamping) error.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Locking (clamping) Switch fault.2. Locking (clamping) Switch setting.3. Air supply fault.4. Wiring fault.


CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: X5.0, X5.1 and X5.2 all LOWX5.3 HIGH






ALARM NUMBER 1029

ALARM MESSAGE: TURRET REFERENCE ERROR

MEANING OF ALARM: The Turret Unit has posted a reference error.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Reference Switch fault.2. Reference Switch setting.3. Air supply fault.4. Wiring fault.








ALARM NUMBER 1030

ALARM MESSAGE: TURRET INTERFACE ERROR

MEANING OF ALARM: The Turret Unit has posted an interface error.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Zero search (ref) missed.2. Position code error.3. Units servo timeout.4. PSTART signal timeout.5. Wiring problem.





ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Check wiring of every signal to the unit.2. Refer to turret maintenance manual supplied.3. Power down/power back up machine. If fault persists



ALARM NUMBER 1031

ALARM MESSAGE: TURRET CRASH SWITCH ERROR

MEANING OF ALARM: The turret has been knocked out of position causing an E--Stop condition.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Machine crash due to programming/operator fault.




CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Emergency Stop

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: Refer to service manual for a procedure of how to mechani-cally re--align the turret.


ALARM NUMBER 1032

ALARM MESSAGE: CHUCK IN UNGRIPPED CONDITION

MEANING OF ALARM: The chuck jaws are in an ungripped condition, when incycle or when a cycle start is attempted.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. No component in chuck.2. Chuck jaws not gripping component properly.3. Cylinder switch fault.


CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: X6.3 and X6.4 LOW


CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold and spindle stop. Cycle start inhibited.

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Press RESET key.2. Check status of ID/OD Grip selection.3. Using open/close chuck pushbuttons, check operation

of chuck jaws.4. Check operation of cylinder advance retract switches.


ALARM NUMBER 1033

ALARM MESSAGE: INITIALISE ID/OD GRIP

MEANING OF ALARM: On power up ID or OD grip is not selected for the chuck.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: See above.





ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Select ID or OD grip pushbutton.


ALARM NUMBER 1034

ALARM MESSAGE: TURRET AIR PRESSURE LOW

MEANING OF ALARM: The main air supply to the machine went below the lowerlimit of 5 bar.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. The air supply to the machine has been turned off eitherat the source of air supply or at the machine air regulatorvalve.

2. An air line on the machine has become disconnected ordamaged.




CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold and Spindle Stop

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Reinstate air supply.2., Depress RESET to cancel alarm.3. Re--align Turret.


ALARM NUMBER 1036

ALARM MESSAGE: T WORD RANGE ERROR

MEANING OF ALARM: A T word has been programmed which is greater than thenumber of Turret stations available.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Programming fault.




CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold and Spindle Stop

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Press RESET key.2. Correct fault in part program.3. Restart part program.


ALARM NUMBER 1037

ALARM MESSAGE: INITIALISE TAILSTOCK QUILL

MEANING OF ALARM: An attempt has been made to cycle start with the quill eithernot fully advanced or not fully retracted.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Quill not advanced due to step advance being used inset up.




CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold -- cycle start inhibited.

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Press RESET key.2. Advance or retract tailstock quill using pushbuttons.3. Resume part program execution.


ALARM NUMBER 1040

ALARM MESSAGE: PARTS CATCHER ADVANCED TIMEOUT

MEANING OF ALARM: The parts catcher has not advanced to its forward (collect)position in the available time.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Wiring fault.2. Faulty solenoid.3. Faulty advanced proximity switch.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: Y8.7 HIGH

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: X7.0 HIGH X7.1 LOW (2 switch parts catcher)X7.1 HIGH (1 switch parts catcher)



ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Press RESET key.2. Using the parts catcher advance and retract push

buttons advance and retract the parts catcher andmonitor the switch and solenoid states.


ALARM NUMBER 1041

ALARM MESSAGE: PARTS CATCHER RETRACTED TIMEOUT

MEANING OF ALARM: The parts catcher has not retracted to its parked position inthe available time.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Wiring fault.2. Faulty solenoid.3. Faulty retract proximity switch.


CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: X7.0 LOWX7.1 HIGH



ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Press RESET key.2. Using the parts catcher advance and retract push

buttons advance and retract the parts catcher andmonitor the switch and solenoid states.


ALARM NUMBER 1042

ALARM MESSAGE: PARTS CATCHER NOT RETRACTED

MEANING OF ALARM: An attempt has been made to move the Renishaw Tool Set-ting Arm (TSA) with the parts catcher not retracted.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Operator error





ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Jog parts catcher to its parked position with pushbutton.2. Proceed to move the TSA as required.


ALARM NUMBER 1043

ALARM MESSAGE: TOOL SETTING ARM NOT PARKED

MEANING OF ALARM: An attempt has been made to move the parts catcher orstart the spindle via M--codes with the Renishaw Tool Set-ting Arm (TSA) not parked.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Operator error





ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Jog TSA to its parked position with the pushbutton.2. Proceed to move parts catcher as required.


ALARM NUMBER 1044

ALARM MESSAGE: TOOL SETTING ARM ADVANCE TIMEOUT

MEANING OF ALARM: The TSA has not advanced (to its active down position)within the allowable time.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Wiring fault.2. Faulty TSA unit.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: Y5.4 HIGH

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: X8.5 LOWX8.6 HIGH



ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Press RESET key.2. Using the pushbuttons advance and retract the TSA

and monitor switch states.3. Refer to TSA manual if fault persists.


ALARM NUMBER 1045

ALARM MESSAGE: TOOL SETTING ARM RETRACT TIMEOUT

MEANING OF ALARM: The TSA has not retracted (to its parked -- stowed position)within the allowable time.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Wiring fault.2. Faulty TSA unit.


CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: X8.5 HIGHX8.6 LOW


CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold and spindle

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Press RESET key.2. Using the pushbuttons advance and retract the TSA

and monitor switch states.3. Refer to TSA manual if fault persists.


ALARM NUMBER 1047

ALARM MESSAGE: NOT IN MDI MODE

MEANING OF ALARM: An attempt has been made to program M74, M75, M90 orM91 M--codes in auto mode instead of MDI.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Operator error.





ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Press RESET key.2. Change mode to MDI and re--program M--codes.


ALARM NUMBER 1048

ALARM MESSAGE: BAR FEED ALARM

MEANING OF ALARM: Multifeed unit -- out of bars.Hydrafeed and Feedmaster -- end of bar signal

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Out of bars


CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: Multifeed -- X7.5 LOWHydrafeed and Feedmaster -- X7.2 LOW



ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Press RESET key.2. Reload bars to Barfeed unit.3. Resume cycle.


ALARM NUMBER 1049

ALARM MESSAGE: BAR FEED NOT IN AUTO MODE

MEANING OF ALARM: An attempt has been made to cycle start with the barfeednot in auto mode.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Barfeed unit not in automatic (auto) mode.




CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold -- cycle start inhibited.

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Press RESET key.2. Place barfeed unit in auto mode.3. Resume NC cycle as required.


ALARM NUMBER 1050

ALARM MESSAGE: PROBE OPEN

MEANING OF ALARM: The ’probe open’ alarm is raised when the stylus is in con-tact with the surface before the skip move begins.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Probe error2. Programming fault

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS:

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS:



ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Return to reference and edit the part program.2. If the stylus remains in an ’open’ (triggered) condition

during any part of the cycle, the ’probe open’ alarm israised. Check that the stylus is not in contact with thesurface or check to see whether vibration is causing itto unseat during a move.

3. The alarm may also be raised at the start of a macro ifthe probe system is in error, (a probe open signal condi-tion is forced by the Renishaw interface).

4. Check to make sure that the probe system is switchedon in time before a skip move begins. A program dwellmay be required.

5. Check that the status LED on the interface is changingstate when the stylus is deflected. If this does not hap-pen contact the supplier of the system for assistance.


ALARM NUMBER 1051

ALARM MESSAGE: PROBE FAIL

MEANING OF ALARM: The alarm ’probe fail’ is raised when the expected surfaceis not contacted within the overtravel of the probe.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Probe fault2. Programming fault





ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Check the program and edit where necessary.2. Check that the probe stylus has been calibrated on the

machine.3. Check that the status LED on the interface is changing

state when the stylus is deflected. If this does not hap-pen contact the supplier of the system for assistance.


ALARM NUMBER 1052

ALARM MESSAGE: ILLEGAL TOOL OFFSET NUMBER T

MEANING OF ALARM: Tool offset ’T0’ is not allowed. If using the ’T’ input on thecycle call line, check the value is not (0) zero, otherwise thisalarm may occur if no tool or tool offset was selected in theMDI mode before running the cycle.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: T0 programmed





ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: Caution: Make sure the turret is safely away from theprobe stylus before indexing the turret.

1. Edit the program input value or select the tool in MDIbefore running the cycle again.


ALARM NUMBER 1053

ALARM MESSAGE: ILLEGAL TOOL NOSE VECTOR H

MEANING OF ALARM: Only vector numbers 1 to 8 are allowed.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: Programming fault.





ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Check and correct the ’H’ input if used, or the ’T’address on the tool offset page.


ALARM NUMBER 1054

ALARM MESSAGE: INPUTS C AND H1--H4 MIXED

MEANING OF ALARM: It is not possible to set a cutter using the ’C’ input with a cor-ner vector H1--H4 specified. Edit the program.






ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Edit/correct program.


ALARM NUMBER 1055

ALARM MESSAGE: BROKEN TOOL

MEANING OF ALARM: This alarm is generated when the tool length error exceedsthe programmed Mm tolerance. When the value is pro-grammed it must be half the total tolerance (see examples).

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: Broken/damaged tool





ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Replace broken/damaged tool


ALARM NUMBER 1056

ALARM MESSAGE: MINIMUM TAPPING SPEED 60 RPM

MEANING OF ALARM: An attempt has been made to program a tapping speedgreater than 60 rpm.






ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Press the reset key.2. Correct fault in part program.3. Restart the part program.


ALARM NUMBER 1057

ALARM MESSAGE: M44/M45 INHIBIT -- CHUCK ROTATING

MEANING OF ALARM: An attempt has been made to program an M44 -- TSA UPor an M45 -- TSA DOWN with the chuck rotating.






ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Press the reset key.2. Correct fault in part program.3. Restart the part program.


ALARM NUMBER 1058

ALARM MESSAGE: SPINDLE CONTOUR MODE (C AXIS) TIMEOUT

MEANING OF ALARM: An attempt has been made to go into C AXIS mode (pro-gramming M51) but the acknowledgement signal has notbeen received within the allowable time.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Faulty wiring to spindle encoder2. Faulty spindle drive -- SP1





ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Depress RESET.2. Attempt to program M51 again.3. If alarm still persists power down machine and turn off


tion of machine wiring to and from the spindle motor an-coder mounted in the back of the spindle motor.



ALARM NUMBER 1059

ALARM MESSAGE: DRIVEN TOOL SPINDLE DEC TO ZERO TIMEOUT

MEANING OF ALARM: A spindle stop request was issued to the spindle drive --SP2 -- Driven Tool -- but the spindle zero speed input wasnot received within the prescribed time. Can also occureven if spindle is stationary as spindle zero speed status isassumed when the spindle is not in use.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Faulty wiring to spindle encoder2. Faulty spindle drive -- SP2

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: G74.5 and G74.4 LOW




ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Depress RESET to cancel alarm.2. Retry stopping and starting driven tool spindle in MDI

mode.3. If the alarm still persists power down machine and turn

the main disconnect switch off.4. Open electrical cabinet and check the general condi-

tion of wiring to and from the spindle drive -- SP2 --andmake sure all connections are secure.

5. If fault still persists it will be necessary to obtain advice/assistance from Cincinnati Machine Service Depart-ment.


ALARM NUMBER 1060

ALARM MESSAGE: SP1 OR SP2 NOT STATIONARY

MEANING OF ALARM: An attempt has been made to program an M51 -- C Axismode ON or an M50 -- C axis mode OFF -- with either thechuck or driven tool spindle rotating.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Programming fault

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: G70.5, G70.4, G74.4 and G74.5 LOW

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: F 45.1 and F49.1 HIGH



ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Press the RESET key.2. Correct fault in part program.3. Restart the part program.


ALARM NUMBER 1061

ALARM MESSAGE: M78/M79 INHIBIT -- CHUCK ROTATING

MEANING OF ALARM: An attempt has been made to program an M78 -- ReleaseChuck Jaws or an M79 -- Grip Chuck Jaws, with the chuckrotating.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Programming fault





ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Press the RESET key.2. Correct fault in part program.3. Restart the part program.


ALARM NUMBER 1062

ALARM MESSAGE: UNEXPECTED HIT

MEANING OF ALARM: The Toolsitting Arm stylus (either TSA or HPA) has beentriggered while not in a probing cycle.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Programming fault2. Setup problem.





ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Press the RESET key.2. Jog the axes away from the stylus.3. Correct fault in part program/setup.4. It may be necessary to reset the alignment of the stylus.5. Restart the part program.


ALARM NUMBER 1063

ALARM MESSAGE: TURRET ALIGN FAILURE

MEANING OF ALARM: The turret has failed to align with the specified time.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: See ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE below.


CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: X5.3 and X5.4 HIGH



ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Power down machine, power back up and attempt toalign the turret again.

2. If fault persists power down the machine and turn themain disconnect switch off.

3. Check all wiring to turret -- refer to electrical schematics.4. If fault still persists it will be necessary to obtain advice/

assistance from Cincinnati Machine Service Depart-ment.


ALARM NUMBER 1064

ALARM MESSAGE: TURRET POSITIONING FAILURE

MEANING OF ALARM: The turret has failed to move within the specified time.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: See ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE below.


CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: X5.3 and X5.4 HIGH after turret move



ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Power down machine, power back up and attempt tomove the turret again.

2. If fault persists power down the machine and turn themain disconnect switch off.

3. Check all electrical wiring to the turret. Fault can occurif there is a wiring fault with the turret Mode01, Mode02or Mode03 Outputs -- refer to electrical schemes andturret manual supplied with this machine.

4. If fault still persists it will be necessary to obtain advice/assistance from Cincinnati Machine Service Depart-ment.


ALARM NUMBER 1065

ALARM MESSAGE: OPEN / CLOSE OPERATOR DOOR

MEANING OF ALARM: After a part program has been completed it is necessary toopen and close the operator door before the program canbe run again.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: Operator door has not been opened / closed after the endof program.





ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Press RESET key to clear alarm.2. Open and then close the operator door.3. Cycle start will take the machine back into cycle.


ALARM NUMBER 1066

ALARM MESSAGE: SERVO AXIS ABNORMAL LOAD DETECTION

MEANING OF ALARM: The axis load detection feature has determined an exces-sive axis load.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Excessive cut.


CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: F90.0 LOW


CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Emergency Stop of axes and spindle.

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Re--apply power to axes drives.2. Re--align machine if necessary.3. Examine part program and workpiece with a view to re-

ducing depth of cut.


ALARM NUMBER 1067

ALARM MESSAGE: HPA PROTECTIVE COVER NOT FITTED

MEANING OF ALARM: An attempt has been made to either:--1. Align the machine.2. Rotate the chuck via spindle start M--Codes.3. Jog the chuck with the JOG keys.4. Move the parts catcher, if one is fitted, by push buttons

or M--Codes.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. HPA protective cover not in place.2. Wiring fault.


CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: X9.5 and X9.6 HIGH



ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Press RESET to clear alarm.2. Fit the protective cover and lock the lever by turning it

clockwise.3. If fault still persists, power down the machine and turn

off at the main disconnect switch.4. Open the electrical cabinet and check the general con-

dition of wiring to and from the HPA probe assembly.


ALARM NUMBER 1068

ALARM MESSAGE: HPA LEVER NOT IN LOCKED POSITION

MEANING OF ALARM: An attempt has been made to either:--1. Go into NC cycle -- via Cycle Start push button.2. Jog the turret via the Turret Jog push buttonsWith the HPA lever not in its locked position.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Lever not in locked position2. Wiring fault.





ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Press RESET to clear alarm.2. Lock the lever by turning it clockwise.3. If fault still persists, power down the machine and turn

off at the main disconnect switch.4. Open the electrical cabinet and check the general con-

dition of wiring to and from the HPA probe assembly.


Operator Messages

Operator messages are displayed in response to various illegal commandsor to indicate that the machine is waiting for operator intervention.

These messages do not cause the control to enter the alarm status, and aremainly automatically cleared when the condition causing the message hasbeen removed.

1000 HR SERVICE -- LUBE2 HAND CONTROL -- USE AUX 1 PUSHBUTTONALIGN AXES FIRSTALIGN TURRETCHUCK ROTATINGDRIVEN TOOL SPINDLE NOT ORIENTATED PRESS HOME PB

TO ORIENTATE SPINDLE AND REFERENCE TURRETDRIVEN TOOL SPINDLE ROTATINGDRY RUN ACTIVE REPRESSFUNCTION NOT SUPPORTEDHPA FITTED -- RETRACT Z TO HIGH LIMIT TO MOVE TURRETMACHINE NOT ALIGNEDNOT IN AUTO OR MDI MODEOPEN OPERATOR DOOR FIRSTOPERATOR DOOR NOT CLOSEDPARTS COUNT = PRESETPRESS HOME PB TO ALIGN TURRETPROGRAM STOP M00 OR M01RESTART SPINDLE FIRSTSPINDLE OVERLOADTURRET NOT ALIGNEDUSE CCW KEY TO RESTARTUSE CW KEY TO RESTARTUSE MPG HANDWHEEL X1 MACHINE UNALIGNEDX AND Z REF SW TO ALIGN TURRET


MESSAGE: 1000 HOUR SERVICE REQUEST -- LUBRICATE AXESWAYS

REASONS FOR MESSAGE DISPLAY: This message is displayed every 1000 hours that the ma-chine power is on. It is a reminder to the operator to carryout routine machine maintenance, i.e. to relubricate themachine axes ways.

MESSAGE SELF CANCELLING: No

TYPICAL OPERATOR REACTIONTO MESSAGE:

Lubricate the machine axes ways by referring to the servicemanual as supplied with the machine.

Depress the RESET pushbutton to clear message display.

MESSAGE: 2 HAND CONTROL -- USE AUX 1 PUSHBUTTON

REASONS FOR MESSAGE DISPLAY: An attempt has been made to jog the turret without press-ing the AUX 1 pushbutton.

MESSAGE SELF CANCELLING: Yes


Press the AUX 1 pushbutton in conjunction with the ap-propriate Turret Jog pushbutton.


MESSAGE: ALIGN AXES FIRST

REASONS FOR MESSAGE DISPLAY: An attempt was made to jog a mechanism before the ma-chine axes were aligned.



Align machine axes.

MESSAGE: ALIGN TURRET

REASONS FOR MESSAGE DISPLAY: An attempt was made to cycle start without first aligning theturret.



Align turret with home pushbutton key.


MESSAGE: CHUCK ROTATING

REASONS FOR MESSAGE DISPLAY: An attempt was made to jog the Renishaw TSA up or downvia pushbuttons with the chuck rotating.



Stop the chuck rotation before attempting to move the TSA.

MESSAGE: DRIVEN TOOL SPINDLE NOT ORIENTATED -- PRESSHOME PB TO ORIENTATE SPINDLE AND REFERENCETURRET

REASONS FOR MESSAGE DISPLAY: After successful axis align this message is displayed.



Pressing the Home pushbutton will orientate the driven toolspindle and then position the turret to station 1.


MESSAGE: DRIVEN TOOL SPINDLE ROTATING

REASONS FOR MESSAGE DISPLAY: An attempt was made to jog the turret with the driven toolspindle rotating.



Stop the driven tool spindle before attempting to jog the tur-ret.

MESSAGE: DRY RUN ACTIVE REPRESS

REASONS FOR MESSAGE DISPLAY: An attempt was made to restart the machine cycle in DRYRUN mode. For safety reasons the first press of theCYCLE START pushbutton in DRY RUN mode only dis-plays the DRY RUN ACTIVE REPRESS message. Ma-chine cycle is then started on the next press of the CYCLESTART.



Acknowledge that DRY RUN is active and required then re-press CYCLE START pushbutton.


MESSAGE: FUNCTION NOT SUPPORTED

REASONS FOR MESSAGE DISPLAY: An attempt was made to use a control function that is eithernot supported or has not been installed.



None

MESSAGE: HPA FITTED -- RETRACT Z TO HIGH LIMIT TO MOVETURRET

REASONS FOR MESSAGE DISPLAY: An attempt was made to jog the turret with the HPA fittedand the Z axis not at its high limit.



Jog Z axis to high limit to allow turret movement.


MESSAGE: MACHINE NOT ALIGNED

REASONS FOR MESSAGE DISPLAY: An attempt was made to cycle start with either the axes notaligned or the turret not aligned.



Align axes and/or turret

MESSAGE: NOT IN AUTO OR MDI MODE

REASONS FOR MESSAGE DISPLAY: An attempt was made to start the machine cycle while notin either AUTO or MDI mode.



Select AUTO or MDI mode


MESSAGE: OPEN OPERATOR DOOR FIRST

REASONS FOR MESSAGE DISPLAY: An attempt was made to:a) Open the chuck jaws.b) Close the chuck jaws.c) Retract the tailstock quill with the operator door closed.



Open operator door.

MESSAGE: OPERATOR DOOR NOT CLOSED

REASONS FOR MESSAGE DISPLAY: An attempt was made to:--a) Restart the spindle.b) Jog the spindle.c) Jog the parts catcher.d) Align the axeswithout the operator access doors being fully closed.



Check that the operator access doors are fully closed andreattempt operation.


MESSAGE: PARTS COUNT = PRESET

REASONS FOR MESSAGE DISPLAY: The optional parts counter facility is indicating that thePART COUNT is equal to the preset PARTS REQUIREDvalue.



1. Depress RESET to cancel message and then reset thePART COUNT to zero.

2. Reset quantity of parts required to new batch size ifnecessary or disable parts counter by setting quantityof parts required to zero.

MESSAGE: PRESS HOME PB TO ALIGN TURRET

REASONS FOR MESSAGE DISPLAY: After successful axis align this message is displayed.

MESSAGE SELF CANCELLING: Yes -- after turret has aligned


Press HOME pushbutton to align turret


MESSAGE: PROGRAM STOP M00 or M0I

REASONS FOR MESSAGE DISPLAY: 1. An M00 program stop code was encountered.2. An M01 optional stop code was encountered while the

optional stop feature was enabled.



1. Open operator door to perform action required duringprogram stop; inspection of part, removal of excessswarf etc.

2. Depress CYCLE START to restart the machine cycleand cancel the PROGRAM STOP message.Note: Coolant and spindle are automatically restarted

if previously active.

MESSAGE: RESTART SPINDLE FIRST

REASONS FOR MESSAGE DISPLAY: An attempt was made to restart the machine cycle withoutfirst restarting the spindle. Spindle rotation had previouslybeen stopped using the SPDL STOP pushbutton.



Restart the machine spindle using either the SPDL CW orSPDL CCW pushbutton depending on the spindle directionwhich was previously active.


MESSAGE: SPINDLE OVERLOAD

REASONS FOR MESSAGE DISPLAY: The spindle drive load limit signal was received from thespindle drive unit.



Note: In the event of a SPINDLE OVERLOAD the machineenters a FEEDHOLD condition but the spindle is notstopped.

To recover from this condition adopt the following proce-dure:1. Turn the feedrate override selector to 10%.2. Depress CYCLE START. This cancels the SPINDLE

OVERLOAD message and restarts the machine cycle.3. Increase the feedrate override but to a rate lower than

that likely to retrip the spindle drive load limit.4. Finally edit the part program feedrates to prevent recur-

rences of SPINDLE OVERLOAD on subsequentcycles.

MESSAGE: TURRET NOT ALIGNED

REASONS FOR MESSAGE DISPLAY: An attempt was made to start NC cycle with the turret notaligned.



Align turret.


MESSAGE: USE CCW KEY TO RESTART

REASONS FOR MESSAGE DISPLAY: An attempt was made to restart the machine spindle usingthe SPDL CW pushbutton when previously the spindle hadbeen stopped via the SPDL STOP pushbutton while rotat-ing in the counter clockwise direction.



Depress the SPDL CCW pushbutton to restart the machinespindle.

MESSAGE: USE CW KEY TO RESTART

REASONS FOR MESSAGE DISPLAY: An attempt was made to restart the machine spindle usingthe SPDL CCW pushbutton when previously the spindlehad been stopped via the SPDL STOP pushbutton while ro-tating in the clockwise direction.



Depress the SPDL CW pushbutton to restart the machinespindle.


MESSAGE: USE MPG HANDWHEEL X1 MACHINE UNALIGNED

REASONS FOR MESSAGE DISPLAY: An attempt has been made to jog or handwheel the axes(with X10 or X100 increments) before the axes/machineare aligned.



Select X1 handwheel increment and move axes if desired.

MESSAGE: X AND Z REF SW TO ALIGN TURRET

REASONS FOR MESSAGE DISPLAY: An attempt was made to align the turret with the X and Zaxes not in their reference switches.



Jog X and Z axes to their positive limits.

Index

Cincinnati Machine 91203597A001 i

AAlarm Messages, 16--7

Auto Tool Setting -- Macro O9012 -- TSA Only, 11--15

Auto Tool Setting -- TSA only, 11--3

Axis, orientation, 2--6

axis, overtravel, 1--25

BBarfeed Spindle Rotation Speed Bits -- Keep Relay K

Bits, 13--4

Barfeeder, 13--1Bar Preparation, 13--1M--Codes, 13--1Standard Barfeed Sequence for Hydrafeed and

Feedmaster, 13--3Standard Barfeed Sequence for Multifeed Unit,

13--2

Batteries, Lithium, 1--27

Battery Replacement, 1--27

CCable Slings, 1--12

Calibration, 11--9Manual Calibration -- Macro O9011, 11--9

Carrying & Lifting Safety, 1--3

Centrifugal Force & Speed Limits for Chucks, 3--20

Chain, Lifting, 1--10

ChuckCentrifugal Force Limits, 3--20Lubrication, 3--20Safety, 3--19Speed Limits, 3--20Top Jaw Recommendations, 3--21Types, 3--20

chuckoperation, 1--25safety, 1--25

Chuck Drawbar Force Control, 3--15

Chucks, 3--20

Control, 2--5

Controls, 3--1Conveyor, 3--17

Conveyor, Controls, 3--17

Coolant, misting, 2--4

DDiagnostics, 16--1

Disconnect Switch, 3--16

Driven Tool Machines, 8--1, 9--1

EElectrical, Isolation Device, 1--24

EMC Directive Requirements, 2--4

Emergency Stop, Push Button, 1--24

Eyebolts, 1--7Inch, 1--7Metric, 1--8

FFANUC Operator Station, 16--5

Diagnostic Address Table, 16--6

FANUC Operators Panel Connection Signals, 16--4

Feed Hold, Push Button, 1--24

Fire, hazard, 2--4

Force Turret CW and CCW, 9--2

Fumes, 2--4

Function Description of M Codes, 7--2

GG codes, 6--1

GE FANUC 21i--TA CNC System, 3--1

GeneralChuck Safety, 3--19Lifting, 1--7Safety Instructions, 1--2

Guard, strength, 2--2

Guarding, Perimeter, 1--23

HHardware Axis Overtravel, 5--1

Hoist Ring, 1--9

HooksP Type, 1--14S Type, 1--14U Type, 1--16

HPA -- Manual Toolsetting Arm, 11--4

Index

ii Cincinnati Machine 91203597A001

IInput/Output Device and Code Number, 15--2

Input/Output Devices, 15--1

Install, Relocate Safety, 1--4

Interlock, Operator Sliding Door, 1--23

Isolation Device, Electrical, 1--24

LLifting

Beam & Spreader Bars, 1--10Devices, 1--7Information Safety, 1--17Safety, 1--3

Limits Chucks, 3--20

Lithium Batteries, 1--27

Lubrication, Chucks, 3--20

MM Codes, Function Description, 7--2

M codes , 7--1

M44 TSA Up, 11--3

M45 TSA Down, 11--3

MachineAlignments & Program Points, 2--27information, 2--1, 2--5location, 2--4Zero, 2--27

machine, orientation, 2--6

Machine Alignment & Program Points, 2--27

Machine Pressure -- Tailstock Thrust -- Chuck Draw-bar Force Control, 3--15

Machine Start Up and Alignment Procedure, 4--1

Machine/Control Alignment Procedure, 4--2

Macro Parameters, 11--6

Macro Probing Routines, 11--2M44 TSA Down, 11--3M44 TSA Up, 11--3Manual Tool Setting, 11--2Operator and Programming Notes, 11--3Tool Setting Arm Activation, 11--3

Macro Routines, 14--1

Macro Variables, 14--1

Main Power Disconnect Switch, 3--16

Maintenance Safety, 1--5

Manual Calibration -- Macro O9011, 11--9

Manual Tool Setting, 11--2

Manual Tool Setting -- Macro O9011, 11--11

MaterialSafety Data Sheet, 1--6Used with this Product, 1--6

Metric Lifting Points, Lifting Points -- Metric, 1--24

MSDS Material Safety Data Sheet, 1--6

MTB Operators control panel, 3--11

NNoise, 2--3

Nylon Slings, 1--13

OOperating Devices, Optional, 3--17

Operation, Setup Safety, 1--4

Operator, Sliding Door, 1--23

Operator Messages, 16--73

Operator panel, Pushbutton decriptions, 3--2

Optional Operating Devices, 3--17

PP Type Hooks, 1--14

Parts Catcher, 12--1M34 Parts Catcher Advance, 12--1M35 Parts Catcher Retract, 12--1Operator and Programming Notes, 12--2

Perimeter, Guarding, 1--23

Personal Safety, 1--2

PMC Input Address Reference List, 16--2

PMC Output Address Reference List, 16--3

Precautions Safety, 1--1

Preferred Metric Lifting Eyebolts, 1--8

Printed circuit boards, handling, 1--22

Program, Points, 2--27

Pushbutton descriptionsAutomatic operation--programme source, 3--3Axis/direction selection, 3--7Coolant buttons, 3--9Execution pushbuttons, 3--3

Index

Cincinnati Machine 91203597A001 iii

Miscellaneous controls, 3--10Operation buttons, 3--5Operation select, 3--6Operator panel, 3--2Spindle control buttons, 3--4

RRange, drawings, 2--9

Relocation & Installation Safety, 1--4

Ring Hoist, 1--9

Rope Wire, 1--12

SS Hooks, 1--14

SafetyCable Slings, 1--12Chain, 1--10Chuck Guidelines, 3--19Features, 1--23General Instructions & Considerations, 1--2Hoist Ring, 1--9Installation & Relocation, 1--4Lifting & Carrying, 1--3Lifting Information, 1--17Maintenance, 1--5Material Safety Data Sheet, 1--6Nylon Slings, 1--13P Type Hooks, 1--14Personal, 1--2Precautions, 1--1S Hooks, 1--14Setup & Operation, 1--4Spreader Bars & Lifting Beams, 1--10Tool, 1--3U Hooks, 1--16Wire Rope, 1--12Work Area, 1--2

safety, chuck, 1--25

Safety And Usage Notes, 1--25

Setup, Operation Safety, 1--4

Sling Load Angle Chart, 1--13

SlingsCable, 1--12Nylon, 1--13

Software and Hardware Axis Overtravel, 5--1

Software Axis Overtravel, 5--1

Software range, Cancel checking, 5--1

Specification, 2--7

Spindle Functions, 8--1

Spindle Jog, 8--2

Spindle Load Meter, 3--11

Spreader Bars & Lifting Beams, 1--10

Start Up and Alignment Procedure, 4--1

Start Up and Shut Down Procedures, 4--1

Stylus Alignment, 11--5Adjusting the Software Back Off Distance, 11--6Control Options, 11--5Standard Calibration Data -- Base Number 522,

11--5

Stylus Position, 11--5

Swarf Conveyor, Controls, 3--17

System, information, 2--1

TT Word, 9--2

Tailstock Thrust -- Chuck Drawbar Force Control,3--15

Tool, Safety, 1--3

Tool Life Management, 9--2

Tool Nose Vector Hh, 11--8

Tool Setting Arm Activation, 11--3

Tool Turret, 9--1

Tooling Functions, 9--1

Toolsetter, 11--1

Top Jaw Chuck, 3--21

TSA/HPA Calibration, 11--4

Turret Alignment, 4--2

Turret Indexes, 9--1

UU Type Hooks, 1--16

WWash Gun, 3--18

Wire Rope, 1--12

Work Area Safety, 1--2

workholding device, 1--25

ZZ Axis, Machine Zero, 2--27

Index

iv Cincinnati Machine 91203597A001

Zero, Machine, 2--27

Documents

201003231452[9145]